JP2015177957A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with an improved motion of a moving device.SOLUTION: An eccentric member 3467 moves away from a movement locus of a suspension member 430. A driving device 464 starts driving before the suspension member 430 starts moving from a second position to a first position. This causes, when the eccentric member 3467 is located on the side where its center of gravity G03 becomes nearer to the movement locus of the suspension member 430 than the rotation center, a rotation of the eccentric member 3467 in the opposite direction to the moving direction of the suspension member 430. Since the torque thus generated assists the suspension member 430 to start moving from the second position to the first position, the driving force necessary for a startup of the suspension member 430 by a driving device 440 can be suppressed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A base member, a moving device capable of moving between a first position of the base member and a second position disposed lower than the first position, and a driving force for driving the moving device; A gaming machine having a first driving device to be generated, an effect device having an operation member that is disposed in a moving device and that rotates, and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device is known. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-217702 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation of the mobile device.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation of a mobile device.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a moving device that is movable between a base member, a first position of the base member, and a second position different from the first position. A first driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving device, an effect device that is rotatably supported on the moving device and disposed on the moving device, and a drive that drives the effect device. And a second driving device that generates force, wherein the operating member is separated from a movement locus of the moving device, and the moving device is moved from one position of the first position or the second position to the other position. Before starting toward the position, the second drive device is driven, and the side closer to the movement locus of the moving device than the center of rotation moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device. Rotate in a manner that

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the moving device is arranged at the one position, the driving of the first driving device is started after the driving of the second driving device is started. Force can be transmitted to the moving device, and transmission of the driving force of the first driving device to the moving device is interrupted before driving of the second driving device is started.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a reaction force generating device that connects the effect device to the base member, and the moving device slides along a straight line. The reaction force generator has an auxiliary member that is pivotally supported at one end by the moving device and guided at the other end by the base member, and one end pivotally supported by the auxiliary member. A connecting member that is pivotally supported by the effect device on the side away from the movement trajectory of the moving device with respect to the rotation axis of the operation member of the effect device, and the guide direction of the auxiliary member is A direction along the tangential direction of the shaft fulcrum between the connecting member and the auxiliary member with the rotation axis as the center is set.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the mobile device can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the moving device can be reliably improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the operation of the moving device can be improved by the reaction force generating device.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the swing operation unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swing operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation | movement unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of Fig.26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversal operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a reversal operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a reversal operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of the reversal operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit along the line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32D, and FIG. 33D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the second slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear, transmission device, and L-shaped lever in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (d) is a front view of a tilting member in the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which illustrates the force loaded along the extending direction of a slide hole to a base member when an eccentric member rotates. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a partial top view of the 1st slide operation unit in the arrow LIVb direction view of Fig.55 (a). (A) is a timing chart illustrating the force applied to the suspension member in the sliding operation direction when the eccentric member rotates, and (b) is a timing chart illustrating an example of the output voltage of the drive motor. is there. (A) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit taken along the line LVIIb-LVIIb in FIG. 57 (a), It is a rear view of 1 slide operation | movement unit, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st slide operation unit in the LVIId-LVIId line | wire of FIG.57 (c). (A) And (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st slide operation | movement unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st slide operation unit in the LXb-LXb line | wire of FIG.59 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a partial rear view of the 1st slide operation unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st slide operation unit in the LXVb-LXVb line | wire of Fig.65 (a). It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the 1st slide operation | movement unit in 6th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first slide operation unit in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first slide operation unit in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first slide operation unit in the ninth embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the first slide operation unit. (A) to (d) is a partial front view of the first slide operation unit in the tenth embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67 The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the made through-hole, and is being fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probable, short-running, or normal, by a lighting state, and whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. )). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards in the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340, 464, 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773, 774.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure for the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. In FIG. 7,
A state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the back case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, a swing operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reversal operation unit 500, a decoration operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210. Configured as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and is in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arrange | positioned by the bottom wall part 211 in the aspect enclosed by (refer FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversal operation unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 700. It is arrange | positioned and accommodated in the back case 210 (refer FIG. 5).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side with respect to a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700). Since it is disposed, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 8, the state in which the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 are arranged at the extended position is shown in FIG. 9, and the tilting member 460 and the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 are shown in FIG. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are disposed in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 300 swings on an arm member 320 that is pivotally supported on the base end side so as to swing, and on the swing end side that is opposite to the base end side of the arm member 320. The arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are operated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. 8. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the upright member 330 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 swings on a suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slid and moved obliquely downward, and a bent arm portion 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported is provided, and the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. 9. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspending member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 9, the suspension member 430 is disposed at the end in the sliding direction (left side), and the tilting member 460 is located at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740 formed to be slidable, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It moves between the position and the overhang position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right outward of the opening 211 a of the back case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are positioned above and below the opening 211 a of the back case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be seen in front view when the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-like reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and is formed so that the surface of the reflecting member 520 viewed from the player can be reversed (turned over). The The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member that protrudes to the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400, and 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated on the left side of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 700 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated not only independently, but also these operations can be combined, so that the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, each operation | movement unit 300-600 is arrange | positioned in the same layer, and each of these operation | movement units 300-600 and the 2nd slide operation | movement unit 700 are arrange | positioned in a different layer (refer FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the tilt member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are displayed. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between the device 81 and the apparatus 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the overhang position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the extended position, so that the player Can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the production effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 are disposed. A gap of 700 minutes for the second slide operation unit is generated between the two. Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the rising member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the extended position, so that the player can A gap seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P (refer FIG. 2) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the effect effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are disposed at the protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 is swung around the swing shaft 312 and the posture of the upright member 330 relative to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swing (the tension is changed). Stand up as you go out). Next, the overall configuration of the swing operation unit 300 will be described.

  14 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base end side by the base member 310, and the arm member 320. Standing member 330 that is internally fitted to the swing end side that is the end opposite to the base end side of the base member 310, and a drive device that is disposed on the back surface of the lower right portion of the base member 310 (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and coupled to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 that applies a biasing force to the arm member 320, and a lower right portion of the base member 310 when viewed from the front And a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the main body.

  The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing operation unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 that is drilled in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311. A cylindrical rocking shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole A guide hole 315 that is a pair of long holes extending concentrically with 311 and formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14), and bent to the opposite side of the guide hole 315 A standing hole 316 that is a long hole that is extended and a hook part 317 that protrudes like a bowl on the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swinging operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the back case 210, and includes a main body portion 321 formed in a long plate shape, A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321; a sliding ring portion 323 opened in the same direction as the tubular portion 322 on the swing end side of the main body portion 321; A plate-shaped front contact portion 324 which is raised and arranged on the front side of the main body portion 321; a long hole-like release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322; A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back surface side of the portion 321 and projecting toward the base member 310, and projecting toward the front side in the left side of the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14). A projecting portion 327.

  The cylindrical portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted to the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung around the cylindrical portion 322 that is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that supports the upright member 330 by internal fitting. It is formed in a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the upright member 330.

  The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in a state where a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321 and the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the portion on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 is the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion. It accommodates in the clearance gap between 321 (refer FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is a long hole connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and the action of regulating the swing of the arm member 320 by the positional relationship of the transmission device 350, the cylindrical portion 322, and the release hole 325. The details will be described later.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are inserted through the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 are slid into the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. Thus, rattling of the arm member 320 is suppressed and the swinging of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Since the ring-shaped collar member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326 in a rotatable manner, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made.

  The protruding portion 327 is a portion where the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and is a portion to which the urging force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The standing member 330 is a member disposed on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the upward direction, and includes a plate-like main body portion 331 and its main body portion. A projecting ring portion 332 projecting in a large-diameter ring shape from the rear surface side of 331, a change sliding portion 333 projecting on the rear surface side on the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the projecting ring portion 332 And a retaining portion 334 that is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

  The main body 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, the standing member 330 is pivotally supported so that the outer surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 is in contact with the inner surface of the sliding ring portion 323 over a wide range (large area). Therefore, even when the large upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, the wobbling of the upright member 330 accompanying the swing of the arm member 320 can be suppressed.

  The change sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the upright hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the upright member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung. The details will be described later. In addition, since a ring-shaped collar member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, the changing sliding portion 333 is prevented from falling off the standing hole 316 and the arm member 320 is swung. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330, and the back surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abutted on the side. Therefore, the standing member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The drive device 340 is a motor that is disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven. The drive gear 341 is inserted into the drive gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the driving device 340 is transmitted first, and is supported on the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 on the proximal end side and meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340. The Moreover, the rocking | fluctuation end which is an edge part on the opposite side to a base end side is provided with the control sliding part 351 which protrudes toward the front side.

  The restriction sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the restriction slide portion 351 is slid into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. In particular, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position toward the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmitting device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring serving as a power source in the swinging operation of the arm member 320, particularly when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position. A proximal end arm portion 361 that is supported (pressed downward) and a movable end side arm portion 362 supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

  Next, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the swing operation unit 300 illustrating the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. FIGS. 16B, 17B, and 18B are rear views of the swing operation unit 300 illustrating the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. 16 shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 17 shows a state in which the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at a point where the curvature of the upright hole 316 changes. 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the upright member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (left and right direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 is accommodated between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player using a space necessary for shielding the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be used effectively.

  In addition, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is disposed at the lower end of the standing hole 316. As a result, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as a stopper when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the extended position, the standing member 330 is changed in a posture (standing posture) in which the major axis direction D1 is directed in the vertical direction.

  The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface (wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 is larger in the vicinity of the upper end than in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315. The In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed with a dimension slightly shorter than the length of the sliding part 326 sandwiched between the main body part 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. In addition, in this embodiment, it forms in the aspect from which the clearance gap formed changes gradually.

  The gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 when starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed when starting the arm member 320 can be ensured.

  Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is longer than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly short dimension (the length of the sliding part 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed substantially equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 disposed near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the standing member 330 is disposed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 tilts forward with the weight of the upright member 330 (falls to the front side of the sheet of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum for forward tilting. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is slightly shorter than the length of the sliding part 326 sandwiched between the main body part 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into contact with the base member 310 on the surface, and the resistance force against the forward tilting of the arm member 320 can be improved.

  Here, the standing hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circular portion 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) that is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of change in the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is in a perpendicular relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323.

  Thereby, the posture change of the standing member 330 is completed in a short period from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually recognizing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as a unit at the extended position while suppressing the vertical shielding space of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

  Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance related to the standing member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the standing member 330 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the cylindrical portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work that the rotational force about the cylindrical portion 322 is applied to the change sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance given to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting of the arm member 320 is securable.

  The concentric circle part 316 b is a part in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed in a direction along a circle centering on the cylindrical part 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle part 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. Thereby, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one body, and an effect of performing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 together can be easily realized.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are disposed at the upper end of the guide hole 315 and the sliding portion of the standing member 330 is changed. 333 is disposed at the upper end of the standing hole 316. Thus, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as stoppers. In particular, as will be described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 360, the necessity of a stopper at the end is greater than when driven by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portion 326 is formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portion 326 functions as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, durability of the sliding part 326 can be improved.

  In addition, although the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 can be functioned as a stopper, since the standing member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem arises. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the protruding position, the protruding end side (upper side in FIG. 18) of the standing member 330 protrudes upward from the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Formed. Therefore, even if the swinging angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, it is possible to ensure the action of protruding the standing member 330 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

  Further, since the moving distance on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 can be ensured while the swing angle of the arm member 320 is kept small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. it can. This effect becomes prominent in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) in which the degree of change in the posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is significant (see FIG. 16), and thus the effect of increasing the starting speed of the arm member 320 is significant. It can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the upright member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 will be described. 19A is a front view of the swing operation unit 300, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 19C is a bottom view of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. FIGS. 19A to 19C show a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. Specifically, the arm member is in the extended position. The state in which the protruding end side of the upright member 330 starts to be accommodated between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 is illustrated in the case of swinging from the retracted position to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front contact portion 324 is disposed on the front side of the upright member 330 (above FIG. 19C). Accordingly, even when the standing member 330 swings around the sliding ring portion 323 on the fulcrum when the arm member 320 is swung (FIG. 19 (c) swings up and down), the standing member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. The wobbling of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A where the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in front view is higher than the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Formed. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the pre-stage where the wobbling of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage where it is arranged in the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, the movement trajectory of the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the wobbling of the standing member 330. it can.

  20 (a) to 20 (d) are diagrams illustrating the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series. It is the partial front enlarged view of the rocking | fluctuation operation unit 300 in an end side. 20B shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20C shows the state from the state of FIG. The state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the extended position is illustrated, and the cover member 370 is not illustrated in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (posture change from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. The transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) from the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. When the regulating sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved via the states of FIG. 20C and FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the driving device 340 can be suppressed. For example, if it is an electric motor, motor capacity can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhang position, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 are extended vertically downward (see FIG. 18B). Thereby, the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 at the time of the start of swinging from the extended position can be suppressed.

  Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. A biasing force of a torsion spring 360 is applied to the arm member 320. In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the proximal end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed by the flange portion 317 of the base member 310 from the upper side, and the moving end side end portion 362 is pressed in the lower right direction by the protruding portion 327 of the arm member 320.

  As a result, the torsion spring 360 has the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum and the distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 is shortened, and the torsion spring 360 is elastic in the direction in which the arm member 320 is lifted (upper left). The force is most accumulated. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation shaft of the arm member 320 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is The direction Y is perpendicular to the direction connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the regulation sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the extended position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  An operation mode of the driving device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulating sliding portion 351 from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (ON state). Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

  Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the proximal side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

  From this state, when the regulating sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. As a result, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode in which the driving force is gradually increased like a driving motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the start of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration at the time of starting of the arm member 320 can be ensured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is allowed to idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the overhang position (see FIG. 20C), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise (in an ON state), and the regulating sliding portion 351 is armed. It is arranged at the dead point in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not always generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is near the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven (ON state) only in the case of being disposed in the position, and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. Thereby, compared with the case where the driving force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, the period during which the drive device 340 is driven can be reduced, so that the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged to coincide.

  As a result, the rotation direction of the restricting sliding portion 351 coincides with the extending direction of the release hole 325 at the time of starting to rotate the arm member 320 from the state where it is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position. Sometimes, the resistance that the regulation sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the extended position. The resulting state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid from the retracted position in an obliquely downward direction (from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front), and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed during the sliding movement. Change (tilts toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and the cover member. Front-side substantially T-shaped suspension member 430 that is sandwiched between 420 and base member 410 and that is slid along the front side surface of base member 410, and a drive that slides the suspension member 430 A driving device 440 for generating a force, a long plate-like auxiliary member 450 whose one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end is coupled to the base member 410, The suspension member 430 mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported on the projecting end side that is the end opposite to the base end side, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front and forms the skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400. A plate-like main body vertically long portion 412 extending vertically downward from the front, and a guide rib portion extending slightly inclined with respect to the left-right direction on the front side of the main body horizontal long portion 411 and projecting in a straight rib shape 413, an insertion hole 414 that is drilled in a substantially central portion of the main body laterally long portion and through which the drive shaft of the driving device 441 is inserted, and a lower portion of the main body longitudinally long portion 412 from the lower right to the upper left as viewed from the front. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in the shape of a long hole that extends, and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the driving device 440 are pivotally supported.

  The main body horizontally long portion 411 includes an outer frame 411a that protrudes in a wall shape toward the front side on the upper and left and right edges. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 is brought into contact with the front side, and is slightly longer than the length of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 in the thickness direction (the vertical direction of the slide plane of the suspension member 430). Long formed.

  The sliding plane of the suspension member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

  The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and that forms a gap with the base member 410. The main body is formed in a plate shape that is substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 in front view. It mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the direction in which the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 extends.

  Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the suspension member 430 is slid in the front-rear direction, the suspension member 430 remains in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, the contact area between the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420 can be ensured evenly.

  The suspension member 430 is a member that is disposed in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and that is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410. A rack gear is provided on the upper side surface. A horizontally long plate-shaped slide main body 431 to be engraved, a concave groove 432 which is recessed in the shape of a groove on the back side of the slide main body 431 and abuts against the guide rib 413 of the base member 410, and a slide A plate-like bent arm portion 433 that is suspended from the substantially central portion of the main body portion 431 and bent toward the protruding position in the middle, and a slide main body portion 431 at a portion where the bent arm portion 433 of the slide main body portion 431 starts to be suspended. A pivot shaft 434 that protrudes from the front side toward the front side, and a cylindrical hanging cylinder 435 that extends toward the front side at the tip (extended end) of the bent arm portion 433.

  The slide main body 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the suspension member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (direction in which the cover member 420 is fastened to the base member 410).

  The concave groove 432 is a concave groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides obliquely downward as the concave groove 432 slides on the guide rib portion 413. Moved.

  The bent arm portion 433 extends along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed in the extended position, and the base member 410 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed in the retracted position. A thickened portion 433a formed with an increased thickness on the front side is provided in a portion formed below the main body laterally long portion 411. The thickness of the bent arm 433 closer to the slide main body 431 than the thickened portion 433a is smaller than that of the slide main body 431 and the thickened portion 433a. Thereby, the bending arm part 433 is formed in such a manner that deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs at the bending arm part 433 on the slide body part 431 side with respect to the thickening part 433a. The thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (slide direction).

  The swing shaft 434 is a shaft that extends through the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projects to the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The suspension cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. Thereby, when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIGS. 21A and 25A), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device in which each member is formed in such a manner that the base member 410 is sandwiched from the front and rear, and generates a driving force necessary for the movement of the suspension member 430. The driving device 440 is inserted into the insertion hole 414 of the base member 410 from the back side. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft that passes therethrough, a drive gear 442 that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and disposed in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442 And a pair of transmission gears 443 respectively supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is engaged with a rack gear carved on the upper side surface of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 engaged with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, one end of which is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end is slid into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body portion 451 that is connected to be formed in a long plate shape, a swing hole 452 that is formed in one end portion, a slide shaft 453 that protrudes in the back direction at the other end portion, And a suspension shaft 454 that protrudes from the intermediate position of the main body 451 in the back direction.

  The auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end thereof is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (perpendicular to FIG. 25). Formed. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides to the retracted position. Thereby, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the hanging member 430 can be prevented from wobbling by contacting the auxiliary member 450.

  The swing hole 452 is pivotally supported on the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. Thereby, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be swingable about the swing shaft 434. That is, as the suspension member 430 is slid, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end portion of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower right end portion in front view) is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (left upper end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is disposed at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415.

  The tilting member 460 is a member that is pivotally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 and has an independent drive source (drive device 464), and is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and has a long plate shape. A base member 461 formed on the base member 461, a first cover member 462 that is fastened to the lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side and forms a gap between the base member 461, the first cover member 462, and the base member A transmission device 463 disposed in a gap formed between the transmission device 461, a drive device 464 that generates a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a longitudinal direction of the base member 461 connected to the transmission device 463. Moving base member 465 formed to be slidable in the direction, and a second cover disposed on the front side of the moving base member 465 and fastened and fixed to the moving base member 465 And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member that is formed in a long plate shape, and projects from the back side in a columnar shape and is supported by a suspended shaft 461a that is fitted in the suspended cylinder 435 of the suspended member 430. A connecting shaft 461b provided side by side with the suspension shaft 461a, a storage portion 461c adjacent to the connection shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the back side, and a front above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d projecting on the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e provided side by side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

  The storage portion 461c forms a space for storing the drive device 464, and a hole through which the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 passes is formed at the bottom.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b that are meshed with the drive gear 463a and are pivotally supported by the pair of rotation shafts 461d, and the pair of transmission gears. A crank pin 463c that mainly protrudes at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b disposed on the moving base member 465 side among the 463b is mainly provided.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated about the rotation shaft 461d as the drive gear 463a is rotated and the transmission gear 463b is rotated.

  The moving base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) projecting from the back side and being inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e, are posture maintaining pins 465a. And a long hole-like slide hole 465b extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction and a pair of bulky upper portions 465c protruding from the front side.

  The slide hole 465b is connected to the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b. Therefore, as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e. The slide is moved.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid as the moving base member 465 is slid.

  The connecting member 470 connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. The connecting member 470 is formed in the upper end portion and pivoted on the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. A suspension hole 471 that is supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 that is formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end portion and that is pivotally supported on the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be swingable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. A state in which the first cover member 466 is slid obliquely upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  The tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23), so that the second cover member 466 is slid, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in front view (see FIG. 24). It is possible to produce an effect that changes.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, vibration and wobble are likely to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. In this embodiment, since there are a plurality of configurations that suppress the vibration and wobble, this will be described below.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the structure of the 1st slide operation unit 400 in the state (refer FIG. 21A) in which the suspending member 430 is arrange | positioned in the retracted position is demonstrated in detail. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25A and 25B show a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the upper end position (retraction position) of the moving path on which the sliding movement is performed, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 that are pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 are arranged in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) to the right outside of the display area P.

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is housed in a position on the front side of the hanging member 430 and the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked in the thickness direction (FIG. 25A, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can arrange | position compactly compared with the total area of each member in. Therefore, the space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and the display area P can be secured large.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and a base is provided on the back surface of the overhang end side (front end side). A main body vertically long portion 412 of the member 410 is disposed. Thereby, wobbling in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by a swing shaft 434 formed near the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, and the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bent arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases in the number of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. It is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

  Therefore, compared to the case where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position, the amount of protrusion (the overhanging length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the distal end of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 is greater when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position. Is shortened. Accordingly, even when the hanging member 430 is wobbled by driving the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed short. Therefore, wobbling in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position (wobble at the tip of the bent arm portion 433) can be suppressed.

  Here, the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. Since the suspension member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with a recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back side, the suspension member 430 is slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends in a straight line from a diagonally downward direction (from the upper right in FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left in FIG. 25 (a)).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 occurs when the driving force of the driving device 440 is transmitted. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 441 from the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise, the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the rotation, and the rack gear engaged with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (left side in FIG. 25A) is moved. The suspension member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. FIG. 26A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26A and 26B show a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the lower end position (extension position) of the moving path on which the sliding movement is performed, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the lower end (left lower end in FIG. 26 (a)) of the slide main body 431 in the moving direction is the outer frame of the base member 410 in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. 411a is contacted. Further, as described above, the suspension member 430 moves downward toward the extended position. Therefore, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the position of the suspension member 430 is changed. It can be reliably maintained in the overhang position.

  For example, when the direction of the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is the horizontal direction, even if the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extension position, no gravity is applied to the direction of the slide movement. It is necessary to add another force to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the force component of gravity is applied in the direction of slide movement. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the overhang position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the suspension member 430 is retracted in the portion where the bent arm portion 433 is accommodated between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. It becomes smaller than the case where it is arranged at the position (see FIG. 25B). Therefore, it is difficult to suppress wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 by the base member 410 and the cover member 420.

  On the other hand, the base side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended toward the extending direction of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower left direction in FIG. 26B) in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the protruding position. Thereby, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspending member 430 is formed wide.

  As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed to be separated from the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420 and the bent arm portion 433 is staggered in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430. It is formed so that it can contact | abut. Since the thin portion (the portion closer to the slide body 431 than the thickened portion 433a) of the bent arm portion 433 is formed so as to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (the wobbling in the thickness direction is dominant). Thereby, the wobbling of the suspension member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  Further, a thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (a portion closer to the slide main body 431 than the thickened portion 433a) is a short direction (slide) of the slide main body 431 that is slid between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. In a direction perpendicular to the direction). As a result, the wobbling caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm 433, and the slide main body 431 can be prevented from wobbling in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 26). it can. Thereby, it can suppress that the slide main-body part 431 is pressed on the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and can suppress the abrasion of the slide main-body part 431 in the thickness direction.

  For example, it is also conceivable that an arm portion having a thickness equivalent to that of the slide main body portion 431 is extended toward the short direction of the slide main body portion 431 and the tip end side of the arm portion is formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the deflection, the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 wobbles, and the wobble of the arm portion is transmitted to the slide main body portion 431. There is a risk that the slide main body 431 may become wobbled.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the thickness of the bent arm portion 433 extending from the slide main body portion 431 is thinned, the wobble generated at the tip of the bent arm portion 433 is used for bending of the thin thickness portion. The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the bent arm portion 433 includes a thickened portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450. Therefore, when the bent arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, the wobbling occurs. The bending arm 433 can be easily brought into contact with the auxiliary member 450 from when the amplitude of is small.

  Returning to FIG. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 serves as a stopper that blocks the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 from moving toward the front side. Thereby, the wobble to the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 when the suspension member 430 is arrange | positioned in the overhang | projection position can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is lower than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is arranged slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid down and tilted toward the extended position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be disposed at a position offset upward by a distance L1 corresponding to the downward tilt.

  Therefore, an extra space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, or the design freedom of the size of the tilting member 460 is reduced.

  However, in this embodiment, as the suspension member 430 moves toward the extended position, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture in a manner of being lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. Lifted relative to member 430. Accordingly, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position (FIG. 26A The lower end position of the tilting member 460 in FIG. 25) is positioned at substantially the same height (the vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

  Therefore, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, it is not necessary to dispose the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending tilt, and to the right of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 The outer space can be used effectively, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the driving device 464 is disposed. Therefore, when the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, since the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (refer FIG. 2) used as the fulcrum of the hanging member 430 to the gravity center of the tilting member 460 is shortened, the hanging member The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the tilting member 460 has a center of gravity formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the rotational direction about the suspended cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. With this force R, the auxiliary member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in a direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, since the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, the wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 that is pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, resistance to wobbling that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that wobbling of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the suspension member 430, all vibrations and wobbles generated by the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the suspension member 430, but in this embodiment, the vibrations and wobbles of the tilting member 460 are suppressed. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be transmitted separately. Thereby, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 excessively, and the design freedom of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 can be improved.

  Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. FIG. 28 shows a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33B) by rotating the reflecting member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 that is pivotally supported by the shaft supporting grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510, and a reflection thereof. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 into which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted, and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the driving portion side of the reflection member 520. The transmission member 550 engraved with the first rack gear 553 meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the drive device 560 that generates a drive force for moving the transmission member 550, and the transmission of the drive device 560 And a cover member 570 that is disposed on the back side of the gear group 562 and is fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

  The base member 510 has a rectangular opening at the center and a bottom surface portion 511 formed in a plane frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom surface portion 511. A first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511. Note that the opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for disposing a base (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is irradiated from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). The

  The bottom surface portion 511 includes a long hole-like slide hole 511a that guides the transmission member 550 and extends in the vertical direction at the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in the rear view (see FIG. 30).

  The slide holes 511a are formed by arranging a plurality (four in this embodiment) in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 in a manner in which the extending directions coincide with each other, and are formed at both upper and lower ends. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end of the slide hole 511a in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a and is narrower than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. Rib portion slide holes 511b are formed.

  Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotation shaft 511c on which a plurality of projections are provided toward the back side below the opening and on which the transmission gear group 562 of the driving device 560 is supported.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove that is cut in a U shape from the front side to the back side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member are formed. In addition, the arrangement | positioning space | interval of the shaft support groove | channel 512a is equal intervals, and is formed in the space | interval shorter than the width dimension (rotation axis direction view longitudinal dimension) of the reflection member 520.

  The second wall portion 513 is disposed opposite to the shaft support groove 512a and has a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and an adjacent shaft support among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. And an extending portion 513b that is formed between the grooves 513a and extends from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 29).

  The extending portion 513b is formed in a stepped shape in which the width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning protruding portion 543 of the second lid member 540 is formed. Fitted.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of light emitted from the light source. The reflecting member 520 is in a straight line from the long plate-like main body 521 formed of an opaque resin material and the left and right ends of the main body 521. A pair of rotating shafts 522 projecting from each other, and a rotating gear 523 that is fastened with the shafts aligned with the rotating shaft 522 of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is disposed. Prepare.

  The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) formed by chamfering on the end surface in the width direction.

  The rotation shaft 522 is formed at the center position of the main body 521 in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29). In addition, the rotation shaft 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed of the pair of rotation shafts 522 is elongated so that the second wall portion is interposed between the rotation gear 523 and the main body 521. 513 is formed so that it can be disposed.

  The rotation gear 523 includes expansion teeth 523a that are connected to adjacent teeth and that are longer in diameter than the other teeth. The overexpanding of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented by the expansion teeth 523a.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-like member fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29), and a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. A portion extending vertically to the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (front surface in FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530 and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531 An extending lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the.

  Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness greater than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, when the reversal operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the part 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to make the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 visible as a unit.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflecting member 520 is set regardless of the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not get in the way, and the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be easily seen as one unit. The effect can be improved.

  Note that at least two assembling methods can be performed for assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530. For example, first, there is a method in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 in a state where the rotation shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is fitted in the shaft support grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflecting member 520 can be inserted through the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

  Second, in the state in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotating shaft 522 opposite to the drive portion side of the reflecting member 520 is connected to the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530. There is a method in which the rotation shaft 522 on the drive unit side is fitted into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall portion 512 after being inserted in an oblique direction (a direction from the front side toward the diagonally right back).

  With reference to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. FIG. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb of FIG. FIG. 31A illustrates a side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. Therefore, for example, even if the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first lid member 530, the reflecting member 520 has the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530. And is pivotally supported.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, as described above, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is pivotally supported between the pivot groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530, and the first lid. It is also supported by the shaft support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31B).

  Therefore, a large area for supporting the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 can be ensured. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to ensure a sufficient area of the shaft support groove 512a that supports the reflection member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Thereby, the space which the 1st cover member 530 and the 1st wall part 512 occupy for the axial direction of the reflective member 520 can be utilized effectively, and the area which pivotally supports the reflective member 520 can fully be ensured.

  Returning to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the drive portion side of the reflecting member 520 to the base member 510, and is a long plate-like base member 541 disposed on the most front side, and the base member 541. Projecting toward the back side and extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30), and projecting in such a manner that the extended shaft support 542 and the base member 541 are connected to each other. Positioning protrusions 543.

  With reference to FIG. 32, the engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A. FIG. 32C is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc of FIG. 32B, and FIG. 32D is a part of the inversion operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIId-XXXIId of FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning protrusions 543 of the second lid member 540 are respectively fitted between the adjacent extending portions 513 b of the base member 510. Thus, the second lid member 540 can be accurately aligned with respect to the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in a long plate shape, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 is bent in the thickness direction so that the reflecting member 520 is axially moved. May be applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extending shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 is contacted from the thickness direction of the extending portion 513b of the base member 510 (the left-right direction in FIG. 32 (c)). Touched. Thereby, the rigidity of the thickness direction of the 2nd wall part 513 can be improved.

  The end portion of the extending shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 in the extending direction is in contact with the end portion of the base member 510 where the shaft support groove 513a is formed, and the open end of the shaft support groove 513a is closed ( (See FIG. 32D). Thereby, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is pivotally supported by the hole formed by the pivotal support groove 513a and the extended pivotal support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  Returning to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in a long plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, an elongated plate-shaped extending wall portion 552 extending from the end surface of the main body portion 551 (the left end surface in FIG. 29) to the front side, and an end surface on the front side of the extending wall portion 552 intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) are disposed on the front side of the main body 551, and the base member 510 slides. A slide shaft 554 connected to the hole 511a, and a rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) of the base member 510 that extends downward from the upper and lower slide shafts 554 of the slide shafts 554. It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously arranged are arranged with an interval slightly shorter than an interval when one tooth is omitted. This space that is spaced can prevent over-rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, but will be described in detail later.

  The drive device 560 is a device that generates a drive force, and is engaged with a drive gear 561 that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft, a gear meshed with the drive gear 561, and the second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. A transmission gear group 562 that meshes with the plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the driving gear 561 of the driving device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the driving force of the driving device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522 as the transmission member 550 is slid.

  33 (a), 33 (b), and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIG. 33 (d) and FIG. FIG. 33E and FIG. 33F are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series. FIG. 34 illustrates the reflecting member 520 in the posture of FIG. It is a partial side view of a transmission member 550.

  33, illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) show a state in which the main body portions 521 of the reflecting member 520 are in contact with each other (closed state). 33 (b) and 33 (e) illustrate a state in which the reflecting member 520 has been rotated a predetermined amount from the state of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) (open state), and FIG. 33 (f) and 33 (f), the reflecting member 520 is directed to the front side opposite to the surface facing the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), and the main body of the reflecting member 520 is provided. A state (closed state) in which 521 are brought into contact with each other is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (d), in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engaged with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550, and the rotation is restricted.

  The rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (leftward in FIG. 33 (d)) by the driving device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is moved. Is rotated, the main body 521 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33E). Further, when the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, the reflecting member 520 is rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction come into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33F).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflecting member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not meshed with high accuracy, the posture of the reflection member 520 in a state where the transmission member 550 is disposed at the end position of the slide movement. Can be stabilized.

  In the closed state, the reflecting member 520 abuts the end of the main body 521 in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. it can.

  Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, when the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, in the middle of the sliding movement of the shutter member from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflection member 520 allows light irradiated to the player to pass through by rotating the reflection member 520 from the closed state while suppressing light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light can be shortened when the reflecting member 520 is rotated.

  In the present embodiment, the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member is reduced by rotating the reflecting member 520 to reduce the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in the front view (see FIG. 32A). Can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to save the installation space of the reflection operation unit 500.

  The chamfered portions 521a are in contact with each other in the closed state of the reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 34). Thereby, the space | interval of the thickness direction of the reflection members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed with the some reflection member 520 can be planarized more.

  For example, when a pattern that is recognized as a single unit on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflecting members 520 is formed on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflecting members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflecting members 520 is made inconspicuous, Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more beautifully.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523a is longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotation gear 523 is to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state of FIG. 33 (a), the expansion teeth 523a are blocked by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. Thereby, the overrotation of the reflection member 520 can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged due to excessive pressure generated on the contact surface of the reflection member 520.

  Further, as described above, the first rack gear 553 is arranged with a gap slightly shorter than the interval when the tooth group in which the four teeth are continuously provided omits one tooth, FIG. ), When the rotation gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 33 (f), the distance between the teeth of the rotation gear 523 formed between the teeth of the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotation gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflecting member 520 from being damaged at the chamfered portion 521a that is the contact surface due to the excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520.

Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. 35A shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 35B shows the pair of first slide members 720. In addition, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the extended position (the front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is illustrated.

  In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display area P is formed so as to be divided into a lattice shape. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. 36 and 38, the base member 710 and the member disposed on the front side of the base member 710 are illustrated in an exploded state. In FIGS. 37 and 39, the base member 710 and the back surface of the base member 710 are illustrated. The state in which the member disposed on the side is disassembled is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 has a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming a display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 in the center. 710, a first slide shaft bar S1 that is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710 and that has a longitudinal direction coinciding with the horizontal direction, and slides along the first slide shaft bar S1. A pair of first slide members 720 that are moved, and a front side cover member 730 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and that is formed as a pair of upper and lower sides. Prepare.

  The second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft bar S2 whose longitudinal direction matches the vertical direction, and its second slide shaft. A pair of second slide members 740 that are slid along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears engaged with the second slide members 740 are disposed, and a pair of second slide members 740 And the back side cover member 760 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the back side of the transmission device 750 and is formed on the left and right and the top, and the first slide member 720 and the back side cover member 760 which are disposed on the back side cover member 760 And a driving device 770 for generating a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, so one side (left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The first slide member 720 includes a main body 721 formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front, a cart 722 fastened and fixed to the main body 721, and extends downward from the lower end of the cart 722. And a decoration unit 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a rack portion 721a in which a rack gear is engraved on the upper surface, and is provided continuously below the rack portion 721a and the rack portion 721a. A plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b disposed on the left side of the front view.

  The trolley part 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the trolley receiving part 721b with the left end aligned with the left end of the trolley receiving part 721b. The trolley part 722 is disposed on the inside of the trolley body part 722a and a trolley body part 722a formed in a U-shaped cross-section by projecting wall parts from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side. And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed with a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface is disposed in a pair of left and right.

  In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are disposed in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft rod S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to protrude slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft S1 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends, and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  The arrangement | positioning aspect to the base member 710 of the 1st slide member 720 is demonstrated. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body groups 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in this state. As a result, the carriage unit 722a is disposed between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft rod S1. Further, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft rod S1.

  Next, the carriage receiving part 721 b and the carriage part 722 of the main body part 721 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the first slide member 720 is pivotally supported by the first slide shaft rod S1 so as to be slidable.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with a transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the driving device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

  When the first slide member 720 is slid, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft rod S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft rod S1 can be reduced, and friction is reduced. Further, since the pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in a pair on the left and right and they are in contact with the first slide shaft rod S1, wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft rod S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Accordingly, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (the left front direction in FIG. 36) about the first slide shaft rod S1, wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and the transmission cylinders 711 and 712 that are arranged to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are rotatable. A fixed gear portion 713 that extends along the vertical direction and has a gear engraved on a wall surface facing inward (rightward in FIG. 38), and meshed with the fixed gear portion 713 and rack gear 754 (see FIG. 39) and a guide wall portion 715 that protrudes from the back surface of the base member 710 and extends in the vertical direction on the right side in the rear view. And mainly.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on the wall surface facing inward (left side in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is constituted by a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one side (upper side in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The second slide member 740 has a main body portion 741 formed in a long plate shape, a cart portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and extends leftward from the left end in front view of the cart portion 742. A decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The carriage part 742 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body part 741 with the upper end coincident with the upper end of the main body part 741. The carriage part 742 includes a carriage main body part 742a that is formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting a wall part from the left and right ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side, and is perpendicular to the bottom surface inside the carriage main body part 742a. A rotating body group 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with a rotating shaft is disposed in a pair.

  In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in parallel vertically, and the length of the left-right interval is formed slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft rod S2.

  The decorative portion 743 includes a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a that are pivotally supported by a shaft that protrudes toward the rear surface at the left end of the front view.

  The second slide shaft rod S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  The arrangement | positioning aspect to the base member 710 of the 2nd slide member 740 is demonstrated. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage portion 742. Accordingly, the second slide member 740 is pivotally supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 so as to be slidable. Further, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft rod S2.

  Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft rod S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Accordingly, the main body portion 741 is disposed between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft rod S2.

  Here, the rack gear carved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

  When the second slide member 740 slides, the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft rod S2, so that the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft rod S2 can be reduced, and friction is reduced. In addition, since the pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in a pair in the upper and lower directions and abut against the second slide shaft rod S2, wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft rod S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having a rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the carriage portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft rod S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 with the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state between the rack gear and the rolling gear 714 can be reduced. Therefore, the resistance which the 2nd slide member 740 receives by the shift | offset | difference of a meshing state can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device that transmits the driving force of the driving device 770 to the second slide member 740, and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 751 and a back surface side of the main body portion 751. A drive gear 752 to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and a tooth meshed with the transmission gear; And a rack gear 754 that is a long plate-like member extending in the direction and is slid up and down along the slide long hole 751a of the main body 751.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) of the pair of upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) is described, and the other description is omitted.

  The main body 751 includes a slide long hole 751a that is formed in a long hole shape with the longitudinal direction in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 includes a cylindrical shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) that protrudes vertically from the front and penetrates the slide long hole 751a of the main body 751. The shaft support portion 754 a is inserted through the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, a transmission mode of the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated via the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide long hole 751a.

  Since the shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, when the rack gear 754 is slid up and down, the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 is meshed with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710 and is also meshed with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 disposed to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, the double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at a double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

  The back-side cover member 760 includes a back-side drive unit cover member 761 disposed on the drive unit side of the second slide member 740, a back-side upper cover member 762 disposed on the top, and the back-side drive unit cover member 761. And a rear retaining cover member 763 that is opposed to the direction.

  The back drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the transmission device 750, and among the drive motors of the drive device 770, drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 are fastened and fixed to the back.

  The back upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

  The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface on the extending end side of the decorative portion 743, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating out from the back surface with the second slide shaft S <b> 2 as a fulcrum.

  The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740. These drive motors 771, 772, 773, and 774 are provided with drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

  With reference to FIG. 40, an example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in time series.

  40A, the pair of first slide members 720 are disposed at the retracted positions, and in FIG. 40B, the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 40 (c) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved by a predetermined amount from the position of FIG. 40 (b) to the right in the front view. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the upper front cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 is not shown.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the drive gears 711a and 712a when the pair of first slide members 720 slide is described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A (the drive gear 711a is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the pair of first slide members 720 Are slid and moved toward the overhanging position, and contacted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 40B).

  A drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side of the pair of first slide members 720 is in the state of FIG. It is controlled to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before reaching. In the present embodiment, since the contact of the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722, it is unnecessary to consider the bending of the decoration portion 723 in the sliding direction. Thus, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  The pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b protrudes slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (the left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a. When rotating, the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b projecting outward from the contact surface side are first brought into contact with each other, and thereafter, the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are pressed against each other. It is done. That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies that protrude outward from the contact surface side in the rotating body group 722b. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 720 can be reduced.

  After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, a drive motor 771 that generates a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pressing the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side of the front view by the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side of the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40C).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without causing the drive motors 771 and 772 to operate in a coordinated manner. Thereby, the electric power consumption in the whole drive motor 771, 772 (refer FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases compared to driving only the first slide member 720 on one side. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, there is no need to consider the gravity load as in the case of moving in the vertical direction, and the amount of increase in the motor load is the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs equally in each.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and the replacement timing of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be easily adjusted. Thereby, the maintenance frequency of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 41, an example of the movement aspect of a pair of 2nd slide member 740 is demonstrated. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in time series.

  41A shows a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 41B shows a state in which the main body portions 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the extended position. 41 (c) shows a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 have been moved a predetermined amount upward from the position in FIG. 41 (b).

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the driving gear 752 (see FIG. 39) during the sliding movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41A, the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are slid and moved toward the extended position, and contacted at the extended position (see FIG. 41B).

  A drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 reaches the state shown in FIG. Control is performed to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before.

  After the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, a drive motor 774 that generates a drive force that slides the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 ( The pair of second slide members 740 is driven by the driving force (see FIG. 35) (the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view is pushed by the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view). The slide is moved upward (see FIG. 41C).

  In other words, after the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without causing the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) to cooperate. Thereby, the power consumption seen in the drive motor 773,774 whole can be suppressed.

  Here, when the member that moves downward changes the direction of movement upward, the load on the drive motor may increase due to the influence of gravity, which may reduce the motor life. In addition, since the deceleration time for changing the direction takes a long time, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of production is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the movement direction from the downward movement to the upward direction, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 is raised. The momentum of movement can be used. As a result, the motor load generated when the direction of the second slide member 740 is changed due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. Moreover, the deceleration time for the direction change of the 2nd slide member 740 can be shortened, and the freedom degree of production can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the bending suppression gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. In addition, illustration of the back surface retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back side cover member 760 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end portion opposite to the end portion supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 contacts the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppressing gear 743a. Be touched.

  Here, when the second slide member 740 is started, the meshing relationship between the bending suppression gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the bending suppression gear 743a rotates smoothly. Therefore, the second sliding member 740 and the receiving gear are rotated. Resistance generated between the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required when starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other between the carriage parts 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decoration part 743, and the side where the bending suppression gear 743a of the decoration part 743 is disposed. Are inclined with respect to the guide wall 715. Thereby, the load from the bending suppression gear 743a to the receiving gear part 715 increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is inclined downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppression gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppression gears 743a is the receiving gear. Pressed against the part 715.

  As a result, a force in a direction to return the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 generated by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the contact between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 is configured by the gear meshing, the contact surface can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slipping between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 come into contact with each other, and thus the inclination of the posture of the decoration portion 743 is suppressed. The effect to do can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 46, the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed has been described. However, the oscillating operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. A state in which the drive gear 2341 is engaged (engaged state) and a state in which the engagement of the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (non-engaged state) can be formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 illustrating the swinging operation of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series in the second embodiment. FIG.

  Note that the main body 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 43A, the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, and in FIG. FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which 320 is swung from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 44B shows a state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c), and FIG. 44B shows a state where the arm member 320 is projected to the front of the projecting position. ), The state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position by the transmission device 2350 being pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown to Fig.43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed so that engagement is possible.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed from the drive shaft and formed in a fan-like shape when viewed from the front, and an extrusion pin 2341b that protrudes from the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 that protrudes toward the front side at the end of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side to the front view.

  The base member 2310 includes a rocking shaft 2318 that protrudes to the front side in the lower right side of the shaft of the drive gear 2341 when viewed from the front.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in a long bar shape, and one end of the L-shaped lever 2380 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310 so as to be swingable. A second main body portion 2382 that is pivotally supported at the other end of the opposite side and is formed into a long rod shape, and a long hole shape extending along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382 is formed. And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is coupled. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be able to swing the front side of the drive gear 2341 and to be able to contact the push pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. The arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position by the transmission device 2350 coupled by the release hole 325 being swung to the state of FIG. 43C by the rotation of the drive gear 2341. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled to the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350 through the pulling slide hole 2383 and inclined toward the transmission device side.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the engagement between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position will be described.

  In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 43C), the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and thus the transmission device 2350 And the drive gear 2341 are disengaged, the arm member 320 is maintained in the retracted position.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (rightward in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pulling slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead point formed by the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 is rotated by the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) Is oscillated toward the overhang position (see FIG. 44B).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged on the right side of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. Thereby, the regulation sliding part 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the extended position (see FIG. 44C).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 coupled to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It is possible to reduce the resistance applied to. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of swinging the arm member 320 at a high speed from the start can be made remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 When the arm is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the arm member 320 is not affected.

  Therefore, even if the capacity of the driving device 2340 is selected to be large by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Thus, it is possible to ensure the high speed at the start when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a), and 46 (b) illustrate a second embodiment in which the operation of swinging the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the extended position is illustrated in time series. It is a front view of rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit 2300 in a form. 45A illustrates a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 45B illustrates a state where the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. 46 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 45 (b), and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhanging position. Is done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the standing member 330 is gently raised has been described. However, in the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the standing member 330 is suddenly raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the standing hole 2316 of the base member 2310 includes a posture changing portion 2316a formed at the upper portion of the bending point and a concentric circle portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

  The posture changing portion 2316 a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 that is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of change in the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45B and 46). (See (a)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a perpendicular relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed in a direction along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle part 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the concentric circular portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the standing hole 2316, the arm member 320 stands up from the retracted position until the arm member 320 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG. The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

  The posture changing portion 2316a is formed at the upper part of the bending point of the upright hole 2316 (that is, near the upper part of the concentric circle part 2316b), so that it is shown in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung in such an arrangement, the upright member 320 is suddenly raised.

  Thereby, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made abrupt. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the high-speed operation of the swing operation unit 2300 felt by the player.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the 1st slide operation unit 2400 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is formed from a resin material has been described. However, in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is formed from an elastic rubber material. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 47A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. In FIG. 47, the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466m disposed at the upper end.

  The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

  The connecting shaft 461 b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed to be extendable / contractable by swinging of the tilting member 2460.

  Here, in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang position, the center of gravity G of the tilt member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a, and therefore the tilt member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs an expansion / contraction operation in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the hanging shaft 461a. Moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 extends and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time until the tilting member 2460 swings back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, the speed of the swinging operation of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and an effect due to the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 48, the 2nd slide operation | movement unit 2700 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and brought into contact with the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and one of the first slide members 2720 is controlled to run backward according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment illustrating an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the extended position. 48, the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. FIG. 48C shows a state in which the right first slide member 2720 has been slid by a predetermined amount of the pair of first slide members 2720, and FIG. 48C shows the first slide on the left side from the state of FIG. A state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is perforated in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48) and extended in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmission type optical sensor disposed on the front side, and the detection device is disposed at a position where the transmitted light can pass through the detection hole 2721c when the first slide member 2720 is slid. 2716. Note that the detection device 2716 is disposed approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the base member 2710 (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48B, when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid from the state of FIG. 48A and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position penetrating the detection hole 2721c, the right side slide member 2720 is moved to the right side. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48C, when the first slide member 2720 on the left side is slid and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches a position penetrating the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 is moved to the left slide member. Control is performed so as to reversely feed (slide to the right) at a speed capable of contacting 2720 at a constant speed.

  That is, while the left first slide member 2720 slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When the penetrating position is reached, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. The

  Based on the position information and the velocity information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse acceleration required for the right first slide member 2720 to contact the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is obtained. The first slide member 2720 on the right side is calculated and controlled with the acceleration.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact | abutting of a pair of 1st slide member 2720 can be relieved, and durability of the 1st slide member 2720 can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the moving base member 465 of the hanging member 460 slides alone has been described. However, the first slide operation unit 3400 in the third embodiment is interlocked with the sliding operation of the moving base member 465. And an eccentric member 3467 that rotates. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (d) are front views of the tilting member 3460 in the third embodiment, illustrating how the eccentric member 3467, the moving base member 465, and the second cover member 466 operate synchronously in time series. is there. In FIGS. 49A to 49D, the first cover member 462 (see FIG. 21) is not shown in order to make the transmission member 463 visible, and the movable base member 465 and the second cover are omitted. Member 466 and eccentric member 3467 are illustrated in phantom lines.

  One end of the eccentric member 3467 is fixed to the drive gear 463a that is supported by the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 (see FIG. 23) and transmits the driving force, and synchronizes the phase with the rotational operation of the drive gear 463a. The center of gravity G03 is disposed at the other end.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the moving base member 465 is disposed at the position closest to the eccentric member 3467 within the sliding operation range, the position where the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is close to the moving base member. (Hereinafter referred to as “the overhang start position”).

  In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the drive shaft 464a is inclined with respect to the sliding movement direction of the moving base member 465 (the extending direction of the slide hole 461e). The line connecting the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the rotating shaft (drive shaft 464a) when starting the hanging member 430 to be extended from the overhanging position is set to a posture in which it is directed in the horizontal direction.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the acceleration of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 becomes maximum upward in FIG. 49A, so that the gravity center positions of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are obtained. The reaction force HO1 applied to the base member 461 is maximized downward in FIG. 49 (a).

  FIG. 49B shows a state in which the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG. In this state, the movable base member 465 is disposed at an intermediate position within the slide operation range. FIG. 49C shows a state in which the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG. 49B. In this state, the moving base member 465 is disposed at a position farthest from the eccentric member 3467 in the slide operation range. FIG. 49D shows a state in which the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG. 49C. In this state, the movable base member 465 is disposed at an intermediate position within the slide operation range.

  From the state of FIG. 49D, the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, thereby returning to the state of FIG. That is, in the tilting member 3460, the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 reciprocate once in the sliding movement direction (extending direction of the slide hole 461e) in conjunction with one rotation of the eccentric member 3467.

  Here, when the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a constant speed, the rotation operation of the crank pin 463c is also performed at a constant speed. Therefore, the acceleration of the extending direction component of the slide hole 461e of the rotation operation of the crank pin 463c is It becomes maximum at the extending direction end of the slide hole 461e in the operation range of 463c, and becomes minimum at the intermediate position.

  That is, the acceleration of the extending direction component of the slide hole 461e of the rotation operation of the crank pin 463c is maximized in the direction away from the eccentric member 3467 in the state of FIG. In the state, it becomes maximum in the direction approaching the eccentric member 3467.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the reaction force HO1 applied to the base member 461 from the center of gravity of the movable base member 465 and the second cover member 466 is maximized downward in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 49C, the reaction force HO1 applied to the base member 461 from the position of the center of gravity of the movable base member 465 and the second cover member 466 is maximized upward in FIG. 49C.

  Next, a load applied to the base member 461 from the eccentric member 3467, the moving base member 465, and the second cover member 466 when the eccentric member 3467 is rotated will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a timing chart illustrating the force applied to the base member 461 along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e when the eccentric member 3467 rotates. 50, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time (corresponding to the rotation angle when the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a constant speed), and the vertical axis represents the load applied to the base member 461 (the positive direction is upward in FIG. 49). Corresponding to). Also ignore the influence of gravity.

  In FIG. 50, the timing Ta1 is in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the timing Tb1 is in the state shown in FIG. 49B, the timing Tc1 is in the state shown in FIG. 49C, and the timing Td1 is shown in FIG. The timing Ta2 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 49 (d), and the timing Ta2 corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 50, when the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a constant speed, the extending direction component of the slide hole 461e (see FIG. 49) of the centrifugal force FO1 generated at the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 (see FIG. 49) is illustrated by a curve FO1c. The reaction force accompanying the movement of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 is shown by a curve HO1C, and the resultant force of the curve HO1C and the curve FO1c is shown by a curve FO2c. In the present embodiment, the mass and operating speed of the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466, and the eccentric member 3467 are set so that the peaks of the curve HO1C and the curve FO1c have the same value.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the curve FO1c has a sinusoidal shape, and the curve HO1C is configured in a state where the phase is advanced by about 150 degrees on the horizontal axis with respect to the curve FO1c. Therefore, the curve FO2c has a wave shape with a smaller amplitude than the curve FO1c, and the load applied to the base member 461 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the curve HO1C is configured in a state where the phase is advanced by about 150 degrees in the horizontal axis with respect to the curve FO1c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the curve HO1C may be configured to advance 180 degrees in the horizontal axis with respect to the curve FO1c. In this case, the value of the curve FO2c is always 0, the load applied to the base member 461 along the slide hole 461e can be suppressed, and the tilting member 3460 is prevented from being displaced in the direction of the slide hole 461e. be able to. Further, for example, when the curve HO1C has no phase shift with respect to the curve FO1c (a pair of curves overlap), the value of the curve FO2c is larger than the centrifugal force of the eccentric member 3467, and the tilting member 3460 is moved to the It can be easily vibrated in the extending direction. Thereby, the production effect of the effect of vibrating the tilting member 3460 can be improved.

  51 (a), 51 (b), 52 (a), and 52 (b) show, in chronological order, the state in which the suspension member 430 is moved from the state in which it is disposed at the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation | movement unit 3400 shown.

  FIG. 51A illustrates a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang position and the eccentric member 3467 is disposed at the overhang side starting position (see FIG. 49A). In the figure, the suspension member 430 is maintained at the overhang position, and the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the overhang side starting position.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the eccentric member 3467 moves the start range T1 before the suspension member 430 slides. It rotates. By starting the eccentric member 3467 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the direction of the inertial force (force by the counter torque CT) applied to the base member 461 is directed clockwise when viewed from the front.

  Therefore, the inertial force applied to the base member 461 urges the suspension member 430 in the upper right direction (direction of tangent to the counter torque CT) via the suspension cylinder 435. Thereby, the driving force required when starting the suspension member 430 can be assisted, and the driving force that the driving device 440 needs to generate when starting the suspension member 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the tangent line of the counter torque CT in the hanging cylinder 435 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433, the inertial force is consumed for the deformation of the thickened portion 433a in the short direction. Therefore, most of the inertial force generated by the counter torque CT can be used to assist the starting of the suspension member 430.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, in the eccentric member 3467, a straight line connecting the rotation center O1 (drive shaft 464a, see FIG. 49A) and the center of gravity G03 is directed in the left-right direction (substantially perpendicular to the gravity direction). Placed on a flat surface). Therefore, the gravity component in the rotation direction of the eccentric member 3467 can be maximized when the eccentric member 3467 is started. Therefore, the gravity can be effectively used when the eccentric member 3467 is started (the biasing member 3467 can be started to be biased from the state where the gravitational acceleration is maximum), and a large acceleration can be secured when the eccentric member 3467 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the tilting member 3460 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 472 of the coupling member 470 at the end opposite to the side pivotally supported by the suspension member 430. The suspension hole 471 is pivotally supported by the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450.

  Therefore, the force due to the counter torque CT generated by starting the eccentric member 3467 can be received at two points, and the load received by the hanging member 430 can be suppressed. Therefore, the durability of the suspension member 430 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the drive device 464 is disposed in the vicinity of the connecting member 470 (the end on the side far from the suspension member 430), most of the load generated by the eccentric member 3467 (force by the counter torque CT) Can be borne by the connecting member 470. That is, by adjusting the arm length from the rotation axis O1 of the eccentric member 3467 to each support point (the suspension cylinder 435 and the suspension shaft 454), the influence of the counter torque applied to each support point is adjusted. be able to.

  Here, since the rotation center O and the tubular portion 472 are close to each other, it can be assumed that the counter torque generated from the rotation center O1 is generated in a pseudo manner around the tubular portion 472. . In this case, in the present embodiment, since the suspension hole 471 is arranged at the upper right of the rotation center O1, the direction of the inertial force due to the counter torque CT in the suspension hole 471 is directed obliquely to the lower right, and the direction is The guide hole 415 is configured to extend along the extending direction.

  Thereby, most of the inertial force generated by starting the eccentric member 3467 can be used to move the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 along the guide hole 415 (resistance received from the guide hole 415 can be reduced). . Therefore, a large force can be secured on the auxiliary member 450.

  Since the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 through the swing hole 452, the force applied to the auxiliary member 450 is transmitted to the suspension member 430.

  Here, in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the angle θ1 formed by the sliding direction of the suspension member 430 and the extending direction of the guide hole 415 is an acute angle (θ1 <90 degrees). The force directed in the extending direction of the guide hole 415 has a slide movement direction component of the suspension member 430. Therefore, the force that urges the suspension member 430 in the sliding movement direction includes an inertial force applied through the suspension cylinder 435 (inertial force by the counter torque CT) and an inertial force applied through the auxiliary member 450. (Inertial force by counter torque CT) and a resultant force.

  Therefore, by securing a large force applied to the auxiliary member 450, it is possible to increase the force for assisting the starting of the suspension member 430, which is necessary for the driving device 440 when starting the suspension member 430 from the extended position. The driving force can be suppressed.

  When the tilting member 3460 changes state from FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 51 (b), the center of gravity G02 of the second cover member 466 is obliquely upward (FIG. 51 (b) upper left direction, overhang position side). Accelerate towards. Here, since the angle θ2 formed by the moving direction of the center of gravity G02 of the second cover member 466 and the sliding movement direction of the suspension member 430 is an acute angle (θ2 <90 degrees), the acceleration of the second cover member 466 is accelerated. Has a component in the sliding direction of the suspension member 430.

  As a result, as a reaction force of the acceleration operation of the second cover member 466, the load applied to the base member 461 in the diagonally downward direction (the lower right direction in FIG. 51 (b)) also causes a component in the sliding direction of the suspension member 430. Therefore, the start of the suspension member 430 can be assisted by the operation of the second cover member 466 (FIG. 51B can be urged in the upper right direction).

  The tilting member 3460 in the state of FIG. 51 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 49 (b). Therefore, as shown in the timing Tb1 of FIG. 50, the tilting member 3460 has a slide hole 461e (see FIG. 49). A maximum load is applied along the bottom. Therefore, starting of the suspension member 430 can be assisted by the resultant force of the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 and the reaction force HO1 of the reaction of the movement base member 465 and the second cover member 466.

  Further, since the center of gravity G02 is disposed on the side of the eccentric member 3467 with the center position of the reciprocating motion of the second cover member 466 as a boundary, the moment of inertia of the tilting member 3460 around the eccentric member 3467 can be suppressed, It is possible to reduce the loss of the counter torque CT generated as a reaction force of the rotation of the eccentric member 3467.

  In FIG. 52A, the suspension member 430 is disposed at an intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as “intermediate position”) between the extended position and the retracted position, and the eccentric member 3467 is moved from the state of FIG. FIG. 52B illustrates a state in which the second cover member 466 is rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. FIG. 52B illustrates the position of the eccentric member 3467 relative to the second cover member 466 from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position while maintaining the above is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, after the eccentric member 3467 is rotated in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the driving device 440 is rotated to cause the hanging member 430 to slide. The starting of the suspension member 430 can be assisted by the force of the counter torque CT, and the driving force required for the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 52, the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 moves while the suspension member 430 slides from the extended position (see FIG. 51 (a)) to the retracted position (see FIG. 52 (b)). It arrange | positions below the rotation center O1. Therefore, the force (centrifugal force FO1) applied to the center of gravity G03 toward the outside in the radial direction of the rotation center O1 is continuously applied in the direction in which the eccentric member 3467 is pushed down.

  Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the eccentric member 3467 makes one rotation, the direction of the load applied to the tilting member 3460 and the suspension member 430 pivotally supported by the tilting member 3460 is switched up and down. Since the distance between the rack portion on the upper surface of the member 430 varies and the meshing between the rack portion and the drive gear 442 becomes worse, it is possible to suppress an increase in driving force required for the drive device 440.

  Assuming that the center of gravity of the tilting member 3460 is substantially the same as the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467, the center of gravity of the tilting member 3460 moves downward while the suspension member 430 moves from FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 52 (a). Move towards. Therefore, the driving force for moving the tilting member 3460 upward (opposing gravity) when starting the suspension member 430 is unnecessary, and the drive device 440 is started from the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. It is possible to suppress the driving force required for the operation.

  In this embodiment, the eccentric member 3467 is controlled to stop in the state shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the centrifugal force FO1 caused by the rotation of the eccentric member 3467 from turning upward in FIG. 52A and becoming a resistance when the tilting member 3460 moves downward. That is, the driving force required for the driving device 440 can be suppressed by stopping the rotation of the eccentric member 3467 in a state where the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 is along the direction of the movement locus of the tilting member 3460.

  Note that the position of the eccentric member 3467 in the state of FIG. 52A is such that the straight line connecting the rotation center O1 and the center of gravity G03 in the state of FIG. 52B is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 415. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 52 (a), when the suspension member 430 slides, the tilting member 3460 is rotated clockwise by the mechanism described later. The rotation direction of the tilting member 3460 is opposite to the rotation direction of the eccentric member 3467 (the same direction as the counter torque CT direction).

  Thereby, after the suspension member 430 is started (from the time when the suspension member 430 starts moving from FIG. 51 (b) to FIG. 52 (a)), the tilting member 3460 is moved in the direction of the force by the counter torque CT. Since the rotation (posture change), the acceleration in the direction of the force due to the counter torque CT and the acceleration in the tangential direction due to the rotation of the tilting member 3460 cancel each other, and the force due to the counter torque CT loaded on the suspension member 430 is suppressed. The

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force due to the counter torque CT from being applied to the suspension member 430 until after the suspension member 430 is started, and the operation after the suspension member 430 is started can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, an independent driving device is not necessary for the rotation (posture change) of the tilting member 3460, and the driving device 440 substitutes the driving force for the rotation (posture change) of the tilting member 3460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of drive devices.

  Here, as an aspect of assisting the starting of the suspension member 430, for example, the suspension member 430 can be assisted (biased) even in a unidirectional load represented by vibration or the like. However, when the eccentric member vibrates, the urging direction due to the vibration is periodically reversed, so the timing of starting the suspending member 430 is the same as the direction in which the eccentric member urges the suspending member 430. It is necessary to match the timing that coincides with the moving direction.

  On the other hand, when the eccentric member 3467 rotates, the counter torque CT due to the rotation is always applied in the same direction if the eccentric member 3467 continues to rotate in the same direction. There is no need to match the phase. Therefore, the suspension member 430 can be started at an arbitrary timing while maintaining a state where the start of the suspension member 430 can be assisted by the counter torque CT of the eccentric member 3467.

  That is, for example, even if the rotation of the eccentric member 3467 is stopped once in the state shown in FIG. 52A and the eccentric member 3467 starts to rotate counterclockwise again when viewed from the front, the eccentric member 3467 is at the extended position. As in the case of starting to rotate, the operation of the suspension member 430 in the sliding direction can be assisted by the force of the counter torque CT. This effect is particularly effective when the member (tilting member 3460) on which the eccentric member 3467 is arranged changes its posture during the movement of the suspension member 430 as in this embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, how the hanging member 430 moves from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. 53 (a), 53 (b), 54 (a), 54 (b), and 55 (a) illustrate the movement of the suspension member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series. It is the front view of the 1st slide operation unit 3400 which was made.

  53A illustrates a state in which the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position. In FIG. 53B, the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted intermediate position (an intermediate position between the retracted position and the intermediate position). ) And the state where the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise relative to the base member 461 from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the cover member 420 is extended along the moving direction of the suspension member 430, and protruded in a rib shape on the front side (FIG. 53 (a) front side). And the position sensor S1 for detecting the position of the auxiliary member 450. The auxiliary member 450 is capable of being detected by the position sensor S1 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position. A projecting piece 455 projecting to the side is provided.

  The position sensor S1 is a photocoupler-type sensor member, and includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit) in which a portion to be detected can be inserted. ) And a sensor formed in a substantially U shape. In the present embodiment, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit are arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 53 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), and the gap (slit) is configured as a space having a width in the front-rear direction.

  The overhanging piece 455 protrudes rightward in front view in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 53A), and is inserted into the gap (slit) of the position sensor S1. Therefore, when the signal detected by the position sensor S1 changes, it can be detected that the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), while the hanging member 430 moves from the retracted position toward the extended position, the eccentric member 3467 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front and tilted. The member 3460 is rotated (posture change) counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The eccentric member 3467 is rotated before the suspension member 430 is started from the state of FIG. 53 (a), or the suspension member 430 and the eccentric member 3467 are simultaneously driven (started) to start eccentricity. The driving force at the start of the suspension member 430 can be assisted by the force of the counter torque CT of the rotation of the member 3467. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive device 440 to start the suspension member 430 can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the suspension member 430 moves from the retracted position, the tilting member 3460 rotates (changes in posture) along the direction of the counter torque CT (the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the eccentric member 3467), so that the counter torque CT Is offset with the rotational torque of the tilting member 3460, and the load transmitted to the suspension member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in driving resistance due to the load due to the counter torque CT being applied to the suspension member 430 while the suspension member 430 is moving.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, in the state where the suspension member 3460 is disposed at the retracted position, the slide movement direction of the second cover member 466 and the slide movement direction of the suspension member 3460 are substantially perpendicular. Here, when a load is applied in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction of the suspension member 3460, the guide rib portion 413 and the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) of the suspension member 3460 rub, and the frictional resistance increases. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 and the reaction force HO1 of the cover member 466 weaken each other by facing in opposite directions, and are applied in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction of the suspension member 3460. The load that is generated can be suppressed. Thereby, the frictional resistance between the guide rib part 413 and the recessed groove 432 of the suspension member 3460 can be reduced, and the load at the time of the drive start of the drive device 440 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 54A illustrates a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at an intermediate position, and the eccentric member 3467 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang side intermediate position (an intermediate position between the overhang position and the intermediate position). FIG. 54A shows a state in which the eccentric member 3467 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise relative to the base member 461 from the state shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 54B, the upper end portion of the auxiliary member 450 is partially enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the intermediate position on the overhang side, the overhang piece 455 does not overlap with the protruding rib 423 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the protruding piece 455 and the protruding rib 423 are prevented from coming into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 55A illustrates a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, and the eccentric member 3467 is clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. The state rotated 90 degrees is illustrated. In FIG. 55A, the upper end portion of the auxiliary member 450 is partially enlarged.

  FIG. 55B is a partial top view of the first slide operation unit 3400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the protruding end of the protruding rib 423 and the protruding piece 455 are separated by a distance D1.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the protruding piece 455 overlaps the protruding rib 423 in the front-rear direction in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the protruding position. Therefore, when the overhanging piece 455 moves in the front-rear direction by the distance D1, the overhanging piece 455 and the protruding rib 423 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, for example, the tilting member 3460 is subjected to the force in the front-rear direction by the rotation operation of the eccentric member 3467, and the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 that overlaps the suspension member 430 in the front-rear direction move in the front-rear direction (the auxiliary member Even if the twisting operation is performed with the longitudinal direction as the axis, the movement of the projecting piece 455 and the protruding rib 423 is suppressed, and the movement is suppressed. Therefore, the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 3460 can be prevented from moving in the front-rear direction (twisting operation about the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member), and the posture of each member can be stabilized.

  The state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position is a state in which the area in front view between which the suspension member 430 is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 is minimized. Since the tip of the bent arm portion 433 of the member 430 is in a state where it is most likely to swing in the front-rear direction, the projecting piece 455 and the protruding rib 423 can come into contact with the hanging member 430 placed at the projecting position. The configuration of the present embodiment is particularly effective.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the protruding piece 455 and the protruding rib 423 cannot be contacted until the hanging member 430 is disposed at the protruding position (for example, the state shown in FIG. 54B). Thus, the movement resistance of the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed until the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive device 440 can be suppressed.

  The relationship between the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 and the force generated as a reaction of the sliding operation of the moving base member 465 in FIGS. 53 to 55 will be described.

  For example, when the tilting member 3460 operates (displaces) while the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a constant speed from the state shown in FIG. 53A (the eccentric member 3467 is in the middle of rotation) to the state shown in FIG. With reference to a straight line parallel to the moving direction of the member 430, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is loaded rearwardly downward (lower right in front view). On the other hand, the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 slide while decelerating toward the front upper side (upper left in the front view), so that the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 is operated. The reaction force is applied to the base member 461 toward the front upper side (left upper side in front view). Therefore, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the load applied to the base member 461 by the operation of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are directed in opposite directions and at least partially cancel each other. Is done.

  When the tilting member 3460 operates (displaces) from the state of FIG. 53 (b) to the state of FIG. 54 (a), it is applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 with reference to the straight line along the moving direction of the hanging member 430. The centrifugal force FO1 is applied to the front lower side (lower left side in front view). On the other hand, the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 slide while accelerating toward the rear lower side (lower right in the front view), so that the movement base member 465 and the second cover member 466 operate according to the center of gravity G02. The reaction force is applied to the base member 461 toward the front upper side (left upper side in front view). Accordingly, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the load applied to the base member 461 by the operation of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are directed in opposite directions (at least in the vertical direction). At least some are offset from each other.

  When the tilting member 3460 operates (displaces) from the state of FIG. 54A to the state of FIG. 54B, it is applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 using the straight line along the moving direction of the hanging member 430 as a reference. The centrifugal force FO1 is applied to the front upper side (left upper side in front view). On the other hand, the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 slide while decelerating toward the rear lower side (lower right in the front view), and therefore the movement of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 is performed. The reaction force is applied to the base member 461 toward the rear lower side (lower right in front view). Therefore, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the load applied to the base member 461 by the operation of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are directed in opposite directions, and at least some of them cancel each other. Is done.

  When the tilting member 3460 operates (displaces) from the state of FIG. 54B to the state of FIG. 55A, it is applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 with reference to the straight line along the moving direction of the hanging member 430. Centrifugal force FO1 is applied to the rear upper side (right upper side in front view). On the other hand, the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 slide while accelerating toward the front upper side (upper left in the front view), so that the movement base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are operated by the center of gravity G02. The reaction force is applied to the base member 461 toward the rear lower side (lower right in front view). Accordingly, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 and the load applied to the base member 461 by the operation of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 are directed in opposite directions (at least in the vertical direction). At least some are offset from each other.

  Therefore, since the force accompanying the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 can be suppressed while the hanging member 430 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position, the hanging member 430 is applied to the hanging member 430. The load that is generated can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the hanging member 430 while maintaining the rotational operation of the eccentric member 3467, and to suppress an increase in the driving resistance of the hanging member 430.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the control of the operation speed when the hanging member 430 moves from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. FIG. 56A is a timing chart illustrating the force applied to the suspension member 430 in the sliding operation direction when the eccentric member 3467 rotates, and FIG. 56B is a diagram illustrating the output voltage of the drive motor 441. It is a timing chart which illustrates an example.

  In FIG. 56A, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time from the start of movement of the suspension member 430 (corresponding to the rotation angle when the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a constant speed), and the vertical axis represents the load on the suspension member 430. (The upward direction of the graph corresponds to the downward direction of the left side of FIG. 55). The influence of gravity is ignored in FIG. 56, and in this embodiment, the eccentric member 3467 has a small number of rotations, and the counter torque is smaller than that of centrifugal force and the like, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the suspension member 430 has a centrifugal force FO1 displayed on the curve FO1h and a movement of the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 displayed on the curve HO1Ch. The reaction force is loaded. Here, in FIG. 56 (a), the sliding movement direction component of the suspension member 430 of each force is illustrated.

  56A, the timing T11 is in the state shown in FIG. 53A, the timing T12 is in the state shown in FIG. 53B, and the timing T13 is in the state shown in FIG. T14 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 54B, and timing T15 corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

  The suspension member 430 is loaded with a resultant force (curve FO2h) of the centrifugal force FO1 represented by the curve FO1h and the reaction force represented by the curve HO1Ch. When the direction of the resultant force coincides with the sliding operation direction of the suspension member 430 (when the curve FO2h is on the upper side of the horizontal axis), the resultant force assists the sliding movement of the suspension member 430. The drive resistance of 440 can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the direction of the resultant force and the sliding operation direction of the suspension member 430 are reversed (when the curve FO2h is on the lower side of the horizontal axis), the resultant force becomes a resistance to the sliding movement of the suspension member 430. Therefore, the driving resistance of the driving device 440 increases. Therefore, the resistance applied to the drive device 440 at the timing when the drive resistance increases becomes excessive, and the durability of the drive device 440 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the control for changing the output voltage of the drive motor 441 is performed at the timing T21 when the direction of the resultant force applied to the suspension member 430 changes. By doing so, the durability of the drive device 440 can be ensured.

  That is, in FIG. 56A, after the timing T21 when the resultant force is arranged on the upper side of the horizontal axis, it is driven by the first output voltage V1, and until the timing T21 when the resultant force is arranged on the lower side of the horizontal axis, It is driven by a second output voltage V2 (V2 <V1) lower than the one output voltage V1.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the output voltage of the drive device 440 is always driven by the first output voltage V1, the amount of rotation of the drive motor 441 of the drive device 440 can be suppressed until the timing T21, and the drive device 440 receives The load can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a mechanism for suppressing the load generated from the tilting member 3460 from being transmitted to the hanging member 430 will be described.

  57 (a) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 3400, and FIG. 57 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 3400 along the line LVIIb-LVIIb in FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57 (c) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 3400, and FIG. 57 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 3400 along the line LVIId-LVIId in FIG. 57 (c). 57 (a) and 57 (c) illustrate a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, and the base member 410 is partially seen in cross section for easy understanding. . FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the tilting member 3460 is rotated counterclockwise (posture change) from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, a straight line L1 drawn from the suspension cylinder 435 to the tubular portion 472 and the suspension shaft 454 to the tubular portion 472. The angle formed with the straight line L2 drawn up to is suppressed (suppressed to 30 degrees or less). Therefore, the angle formed by the swing direction L2v about the suspension shaft 454 of the connecting member 470 and the swing direction L1v about the suspension cylinder 435 of the tilt member 3460 can be suppressed.

  Thereby, when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the tilting member 3460 is easily swung with respect to the hanging member 430, thereby suppressing the load applied to the hanging member 430. Can do. For example, the suspension member 430 is moved from the extended position to the retracted position, and a load is applied from the tilting member 3460 to the suspension member 430 due to inertia when stopping at the retracted position (see FIG. 57A). In this embodiment, the inertial force when the tilting member 3460 is stopped is consumed for the swinging of the tilting member 3460 (see FIG. 57C). Therefore, the force transmitted to the suspension member 430 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (d), the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 is configured as a long part in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 57 (d)). By curving the lower cylinder 435 (see FIG. 57D), the distance between the suspension shaft 454 and the suspension cylinder 435 can be corrected (shortened). This suppresses the angle between the swing direction L2v of the connecting member 470 with the suspension shaft 454 as an axis and the swing direction L1v of the tilt member 3460 with the suspension cylinder 435 as an axis (from 0 to 20 degrees). Can be suppressed to a range of.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, the connecting member 470 receives a load in the direction in which the tip of the connecting member 470 is separated from the auxiliary member 450 by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3.

  Next, referring to FIG. 58, until the suspension member 430 is disposed from the intermediate position to the extended position, a force by the counter torque CT applied to the tilting member 3460 is applied to the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450. The direction will be described.

  58A and 58B are rear views of the first slide operation unit 3400. FIG. FIG. 58A shows a state (see FIG. 54A) in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the intermediate position when the suspension member 430 moves from the retracted position to the extended position. 58 (b) shows a state (see FIG. 55 (a)) in which the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position when the hanging member 430 moves from the retracted position to the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the intermediate position, the component of the counter torque CT applied to the suspension shaft 454 around the rotation center O1 is directed in the direction D31. The component of the counter torque CT applied to the hanging cylinder 435 around O1 is directed in the direction D32. Since the direction D31 and the direction D32 are opposite to each other in the direction perpendicular to the sliding operation direction D30 of the suspension member 430, the force for lifting the auxiliary member 450 along the direction D31 and the suspension member along the direction D32 The force pushing down 430 is partially offset from each other in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction D30. In FIG. 58A, the connecting shaft 461b close to the rotation center O1 is illustrated as a pseudo center of the counter torque CT for easy understanding.

  Here, when there is no auxiliary member 450, the suspension member 430 continues to generate a load directed downward in the vertical direction of the slide operation direction D30 as a component of the direction D32 (first state). For example, the eccentric member 3467 is at high speed. If the suspension member 430 rotates and rubs against the guide rib portion 413, the durability of the guide rib portion 413 and the suspension member 430 may be reduced. Further, when the guide rib portion 413 is worn and the surface is roughened, the movement resistance of the suspension member 430 may increase.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction C31 of the force applied to the auxiliary member 450 faces upward with respect to the slide operation direction D30, and thus the direction in which the suspension member 430 and the drive device 440 face each other (slide It is possible to suppress an excessive load from being generated in the direction perpendicular to the operation direction D30, and to suppress the driving resistance of the driving device 440.

  Note that the difference in direction between the direction D31 and the direction D32 passes through the rotation axis O1 of the eccentric member 3467 (in this embodiment, the connection shaft 461 which is a pseudo rotation center close to the eccentric member 3467) and is perpendicular to the slide operation direction D30. This is because the suspension cylinder 435 is disposed in one of the two regions separated by a straight line, and the suspension shaft 454 is disposed in the other region.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted intermediate position (see FIG. 53B), the rotation center O1 and the suspension cylinder 435 are on a straight line perpendicular to the slide operation direction D30. Since it is in a generally arranged state, the force exerted by the counter torque CT on the hanging cylinder 435 is directed in a direction parallel to the slide operation direction D30 (second state). Therefore, in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted intermediate position, for example, even if the eccentric member 3467 rotates at a high speed, a load applied in the width direction of the guide rib portion 413 via the suspension member 430 is applied. Can be suppressed.

  Since the switching between the first state and the second state described above occurs as the suspension device 430 moves, a separate driving device for switching between the first state and the second state can be eliminated. That is, the drive motor 441 that drives the suspension device 430 can be substituted.

  In the state of FIG. 58 (b), the cylindrical portion 472 is moved forward and upward (upper right in FIG. 58 (b)) with respect to the suspension shaft 454 as compared with the state of FIG. Since the cylinder 435 is moved forward and downward (lower right in FIG. 58 (b)) with respect to the cylindrical portion 472 (the angle formed by the straight line connecting the connecting shaft 461b and the suspension shaft 454 and the sliding operation direction D30 gradually decreases). At the same time, the angle formed by the straight line connecting the connecting shaft 461b and the suspension cylinder 435 and the slide operation direction D30 is gradually reduced), so that the direction is the direction of the component of the counter torque CT applied to the suspension shaft 454 around the rotation center O1. The component in the direction perpendicular to the sliding operation direction D30 between D33 and the direction D34 which is the direction of the component of the counter torque CT applied to the hanging cylinder 435 around the rotation center O1 is compared with the state of FIG. Big That.

  Here, for example, when there is no auxiliary member 450 and only the force applied to the hanging cylinder 435 has a component in the direction perpendicular to the sliding operation direction D30, the load on the hanging member 430 may be excessive. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the component of the force applied to the suspension shaft 454 in the direction perpendicular to the sliding operation direction D30 is also increased.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the component in the direction of the slide operation direction D30 from becoming excessive, and the load applied to the suspension member 430 along the slide operation direction D30 when the suspension member 430 reaches the extended position. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the suspension member 430 from vibrating due to the reaction (counter torque CT) of the operation of the eccentric member 3467 when the suspension member 430 stops at the extended position.

  The auxiliary member 450 is several times longer from the suspension shaft 454 to the swing hole 452 (see FIG. 53A) than the suspension shaft 454 to the slide shaft 453 (see FIG. 53A). In this embodiment, it is configured to be about twice. As a result, the distribution of the force applied along the width direction of the auxiliary member 450 is compared with the distribution transmitted to the base member 410 via the slide shaft 453, and the suspension member 430 via the swing hole 452. The distribution transmitted to can be made smaller. Thus, the load applied to the suspension member 430 from the auxiliary member 450 can be adjusted by the position where the connecting member 470 is connected to the auxiliary member 450.

  Further, since the connecting member 470 is biased in the direction away from the auxiliary member 450 by the torsion spring SP3, when the counter torque CT of the eccentric member 3467 varies, the posture of the tilting member 3460 is prevented from varying. be able to. That is, the tilting member 3460 can be pressed in one direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3, and the posture of the tilting member 3460 can be easily maintained.

  The biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is such that the angle at which the connecting member 470 intersects the circle C31 centered on the suspension cylinder 435 and the circle C32 centered on the suspension shaft 454 is substantially vertical (FIG. 58 ( Energize toward b). Thereby, in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 58B), the posture of the connecting member 470 can be fixed to the auxiliary member 450 (cannot be swung). it can.

  In a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the sliding operation direction of the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 and the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 are substantially parallel.

  Therefore, even when the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is loaded with the centrifugal force FO1 in the direction perpendicular to the slide operation direction in which the moving base member 465 and the second cover member 466 cannot cancel the load, The centrifugal force FO1 can be borne (received by the surface) over the entire longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450. Therefore, the load applied to the suspension member 430 can be suppressed. That is, the configuration of the auxiliary member 450 can adjust how the centrifugal force FO1 is loaded on the suspension member 430.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 64. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the suspension member 430 is a fixed member has been described. However, in the first slide operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment, the suspension device 4430 extends the guide rib portion 413. It is configured to be movable (deformable) in a direction perpendicular to the installation direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  59 (a), 59 (b) and 60 (a) are front views of the first slide operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is an LXb of FIG. 59 (b). It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st slide operation unit 4400 in the -LXb line. In FIG. 59 (a), the state in which the suspension device 4430 is disposed at the extended position is shown in FIG. 59 (b), and the state in which the suspension device 4430 is disposed at the intermediate position is illustrated in FIG. Then, the state in which the suspending device 4430 is disposed in the retracted position is illustrated, and the eccentric member 3467 is stopped with respect to the tilting member 3460 in FIGS. 59 (a) to 60 (a). In order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 4410 is omitted, and the auxiliary member 450 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a), 59 (b) and 60 (a), the first slide operation unit 4400 is a wide guide hole which is a long hole extending in parallel below the guide rib portion 413. A base member 4410 having 4417 and a suspension device 4430 having an arm member 4430b movable in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417.

  The wide guide hole 4417 is a long hole that is extended by a distance that the suspension device 4430 slides, and is a terminal fixing portion that is disposed at both ends in the extending direction so that the length in the width direction is reduced. 4417a and a prevention convex portion 4417b projecting downward from the upper side surface are mainly provided.

  The prevention convex portion 4417b is a portion that prevents the arm member 4430b from moving in the direction opposite to the sliding movement direction of the suspension device 4430, and is similar to the arrangement interval of the pair of guided convex portions 4433b. One pair is arranged at intervals, and in this embodiment, three sets are arranged with a substantially uniform width in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417. The shape of the prevention convex portion 4417b is such that the right side surface in the front view is perpendicular to the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 and the left side surface inclines at about 45 degrees from the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 in the front view. .

  The suspension device 4430 includes a driven member 4430a that has a slide main body portion 431 and a recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) and directly receives the driving force of the driving device 440, and a bent arm portion 433. Arm member 4430b that slides in conjunction with 4430a.

  The driven member 4430a includes a pair of guide recesses 4431a that are recessed from the lower end thereof in a direction perpendicular to the guide rib portion 413 and that are perforated in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 59 (a)).

  The arm member 4430b extends from the upper end portion toward the driven member 4430a with a width slightly shorter than the width of the fitting recess 4431a and an extension height slightly shorter than the depth of the guide recess 4431, whereby the guide recess 4431a. Guided convex portion 4433b configured to be movable on the inside, and a movement width that is projected from the back side of the tip of the guided convex portion 4433b toward the base member 4410 and is inserted through the wide guide hole 4417 And a prescribed convex portion 4433c (see FIG. 60B).

  The movement width defining convex portion 4433c is a portion that defines a movement width in which the arm member 4430b moves in the direction of approaching and moving away from the driven member 4430a (the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417) while the suspension device 4430 slides. is there. That is, the width in which the arm member 4430b moves relative to the driven member during the movement of the suspension device 4430 depends on the shape of the wide guide hole 4417 through which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c is inserted.

  The end fixing portion 4417a is a portion whose width is narrowed to the side closer to the driven member 4430a at both ends in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417, and the width thereof is a moving width defining convex portion 4433c (FIG. 60B). (See)). Therefore, in a state in which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c is disposed on the terminal end fixing portion 4417a, the arm member 4430b is in the concave direction of the guide concave portion 4431a with respect to the driven member 4430a (closer to and away from the driven member 4430). Direction) is restricted.

  Therefore, the arm member 4430b that has reached the extended position or the retracted position by the sliding movement of the suspension device 4430 is prevented from performing an operation of jumping along the guide recess 4431a due to inertia when the suspension device 4430 stops. be able to. Thereby, the attitude | position at the time of the tilting member 3460 pivotally supported by the arm member 4430b being arrange | positioned in an extension position or a retracted position can be stabilized, and an effect can be improved.

  Since this effect is achieved depending on the shape of the wide guide hole 4417, it is not necessary to arrange another member, and the component cost can be reduced compared to the case where the same effect is achieved by another member. can do.

  Note that, in the extended position or the retracted position, the sliding movement of the suspension device 4430 stops, so that a change in driving resistance between the driving device 440 and the driven member 4430a cannot occur. Therefore, even if the eccentric member 3467 is operated while the movement of the arm member 4430b with respect to the driven member 4430a is restricted, the possibility that the driving device 440 or the driven member 4430a is damaged is minimized.

  61A and 61B are front views of the first slide operation unit 4400. FIG. 61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate a state in which the suspension device 4430 is disposed at an intermediate position. In FIG. 61 (a), the center of gravity G03 of the rotating eccentric member 3467 is directed downward. In FIG. 61B, the center of gravity G03 of the rotating eccentric member 3467 is directed upward, and the arm member 4430b is moved upward by the centrifugal force FO1. The state of being arranged in each is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), when the eccentric member 3467 performs an effect of rotating, the centrifugal force FO1 is applied to the tilting member 3460 in accordance with the change in the position of the center of gravity G03. . The centrifugal force FO1 is transmitted to the suspension device 4430. For example, when the centrifugal force FO1 is applied upward, the centrifugal force FO1 is between the rack portion formed on the upper side surface of the suspension device 4430 and the drive device 440. May increase the load generated in the rack, or the transmission gear 443 of the drive unit 440 may be damaged.

  Further, since the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 is not constant and the direction is changed, the direction in which the centrifugal force FO1 approaches and separates between the rack portion formed on the upper side surface of the suspension device 4430 and the transmission gear 443 of the drive device 440 (wide guide). A repeated load in the width direction of the hole 4417 is applied, and the rack portion or the transmission gear 443 of the driving device 440 is easily damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, for example, from the state of FIG. 61A, when the eccentric member 3467 rotates half-clockwise counterclockwise in a front view and the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 changes upward, The arm member 4430b moves along the extending direction of the guide recess 4431a by the force FO1. That is, the load transmitted to the suspension device 4430 via the tilting member 3460 is consumed by moving the arm member 4430b along the guide recess 4431a, and is formed on the upper side surface of the suspension device 4430. Generation of a load between the rack portion and the transmission gear 443 of the driving device 440 can be suppressed, and damage to each member can be prevented.

  The arm member 4430b is driven by a combination of a long hole drilled in the front-rear direction of the driven member 4430a and a convex part protruding in the front-rear direction from the arm member 4430b and inserted through the long hole. However, according to this, the arm member 4430b cannot be accommodated within the thickness of the slide main body 431 of the driven member 4430a, and the driven member 4430a and the arm member 4430b are arranged. The dimension of the thickness direction of the front-back direction to install increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guided convex portion 4433b of the arm member 4430b is inserted from below into a guide concave portion 4431a that is recessed upward from the lower side surface of the driven member 4430a. The arm member 4430b can be disposed within the thickness in the front-rear direction of the driven member 4430a, and the thickness in the front-rear direction in which the driven member 4430a and the arm member 4430b are disposed can be suppressed.

  62 (a), 62 (b), 63 (a), 63 (b), and 64 show the direction in which the suspension device 4430 is directed from the extended position to the retracted position while the eccentric member 3467 rotates ( FIG. 62A is a front view of a first slide operation unit 4400 illustrating a state in which a slide operation is performed in a time series manner in the upper right direction of FIG. Since the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is disposed at the end of the eccentric member 3467 opposite to the rotation axis, the load due to the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 in FIGS. The eccentric member 3467 works in the direction from the rotation center O1 to the center of gravity G03.

  In FIG. 62 (a), since the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is arranged at the lower right with respect to the rotation center O1 of the eccentric member 3467, the centrifugal force FO1 is loaded toward the lower right.

  In FIG. 62B, the eccentric member 3467 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 62A, and the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is arranged on the upper right with respect to the rotation center O1 of the eccentric member 3467. Therefore, the centrifugal force FO1 is loaded toward the lower right.

  62 (a) and 62 (b), the direction of the extending direction component of the wide guide hole 4417 of the centrifugal force FO1 is the same as the direction in which the suspension device 4430 moves (upper right direction in FIG. 62 (a)). Therefore, there is little possibility that the load due to the centrifugal force FO1 gives a large load to the drive device 440 via the suspension device 4430.

  In FIG. 63A, the eccentric member 3467 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 62B, and the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is arranged on the upper right with respect to the rotation center O1 of the eccentric member 3467. As a result, the centrifugal force FO1 applied to the upper right is generated, and the arm member 4430b is moved up along the guide recess 4431a.

  In FIG. 63 (b), the eccentric member 3467 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is arranged at the upper left with respect to the rotation center O1 of the eccentric member 3467. The

  In FIG. 64, the eccentric member 3467 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63B, and the center of gravity G03 of the eccentric member 3467 is arranged on the lower right side with respect to the rotation center O1 of the eccentric member 3467.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64, as the eccentric member 3467 rotates, the arm member 4430b moves along the guide recess 4431a. In the state shown, the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 is opposite to the moving direction of the suspension device 4430. Therefore, the load between the suspension device 4430 and the drive device 440 along the slide movement direction of the suspension device 4430 becomes excessive, and the transmission gear 443 of the drive device 440 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the prevention convex portion 4417b contacts the movement width defining convex portion 4433c, so that the arm member 4430b extends along the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 from the state of FIG. Moving to the left can be prevented. Thereby, the extent to which the arm member 4430b moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the suspension device 4430 can be reduced, and the load between the suspension device 4430 and the drive device 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 443 of the driving device 440 from being damaged.

  Also, since the right side surface of the prevention convex portion 4417b is perpendicular to the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417, the state shown in FIG. 63B (the right side surface of the prevention convex portion 4417b is the right side surface). To prevent the arm member 4430b from running backward (moving to the lower left in FIG. 63 (b)) in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417. it can.

  On the other hand, the angle of the angle formed with the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 is acute on the left side surface of the prevention convex portion 4417b when viewed from the front, so that the arm member 4430b receives a load in the sliding movement direction of the suspension device 4430. At this time, it is possible to prevent the movement of the prevention convex portion 4417b from being blocked. That is, even if the movement width defining convex portion 4433c comes into contact with the prevention convex portion 4417b from the left in the front view, the movement width defining convex portion 4433c moves along the inclination of the left side surface of the prevention convex portion 4417b. The arm member 4430b can be moved along the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417.

  The above-described reverse running prevention function of the prevention convex portion 4417b is exhibited by associating (controlling) the phase of the eccentric member 3467 and the position of the suspension device 4430 that slides. 62 (a) to 64 show the positional relationship between the prevention convex portion 4417b and the suspension device 4430 arranged in the middle of the wide guide hole 4417 as a representative example. The prevention protrusions 4417b arranged on the left and right sides of the view can also have a reverse running prevention function.

  That is, in this embodiment, since three sets of prevention convex portions 4417b are arranged in the wide guide hole 4417, the left side along the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 with respect to the right side surface of the prevention convex portion 4417b. The eccentric member 3467 is rotated in such a manner that the eccentric member 3467 is directed to the phase where the centrifugal force FO1 is applied (the eccentric member 3467 is rotated approximately three times while the suspension device 4430 moves from the extended position to the retracted position). Thereby, the rotation effect of the eccentric member 3467 can be performed while suppressing the load along the sliding direction to the drive device 440.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the slide main body 431 and the driving device 440 configure a state in which the driving force can be transmitted at all times has been described. However, the first slide operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is a suspension device. 5430 is configured to be able to switch between a state where the driving force is transmitted from the driving device 440 and a state where the driving force is not transmitted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 65A is a partial rear view of the first slide operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 65B is a diagram of the first slide operation unit 5400 taken along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view. In order to facilitate understanding, the auxiliary member 450 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the base member 410 is not illustrated. In FIG. 65A, neither the rack gear of the slide main body 431 nor the rack gear of the movable rack 5436 is engaged with the transmission gear 443.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the suspension device 5430 is disposed on the back side of the slide body portion 431, and is a movable rack that is coupled to the slide body portion 431 so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the suspension device 5430. 5436 and a U-shaped transmission member 5437 that is disposed so as to be in contact with the movable rack 5436 and is pivotally supported at an intermediate position of the bent arm portion 433.

  The movable rack 5436 includes a guide elongated hole 5436a through which a latching convex portion 5431b projecting from the slide main body portion 431 is inserted, and is transmitted in the same manner as the rack gear formed on the upper side surface of the slide main body portion 431. A rack gear that can mesh with the gear 443 is formed on the upper side surface. In this embodiment, since the transmission gear 443 is formed long in the axial direction, the slide main body 431 and the movable rack 5436 can be simultaneously engaged at different positions in the tooth thickness direction (axial direction of the transmission gear 443). It is said.

  One end portion of the transmission member 5437 can be brought into contact with the front side surface (the right side surface in FIG. 65 (a)) of the movable rack 5436, and the other end portion is one of the posture maintaining pins 465a of the tilting member 5460. It arrange | positions so that contact | abutment is possible. In this embodiment, one of the posture maintaining pins 465a (one at the lower right in FIG. 65 (a)) is larger on the back side than the other posture maintaining pins 465a (bent arm portion). And a concave recess for avoiding interference with the posture maintaining pin 465a is disposed at the distal end of the bent arm 433.

  In the state of FIG. 65 (a), neither the movable rack 5436 nor the slide main body 431 is engaged with the transmission gear 443. Therefore, even if the drive motor 441 is driven, the driving force is applied to the movable rack 5436 or the slide main body 431. Can be prevented from being transmitted.

  FIG. 66 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 5400. FIG. In FIG. 66, the posture maintaining pin 465a is moved from the state of FIG. 65, the transmission member 5437 is rotated, and thereby the movable rack 5436 is slid, and the movable rack 5436 and the transmission gear 443 are engaged with each other. Illustrated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the driving motor 441 of the driving device 440 is driven and the transmission gear 443 rotates, whereby the driving force is transmitted to the moving rack 5436.

  Here, the posture maintaining pin 465 a is moved with the movement of the moving base member 465, and the moving base member 465 slides by driving of the driving device 464. Therefore, the driving force transmission sequence in which the driving force of the driving device 440 is transmitted to the movable rack 5436 after the driving device 464 starts driving can be reliably configured. Thus, the drive device 440 is driven before the drive device 464 is driven (before the assist of the counter torque CT (see FIG. 51B) due to the rotation of the eccentric member 3467), and the driving force is applied to the suspension member 430. By being transmitted to the drive device 440, it is possible to suppress an excessive load being applied to the drive device 440.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, a state at the start of the hanging device 5430 will be described. 67 (a), 67 (b), 68 (a) and 68 (b) are partial rear views of the first slide operation unit 5400 illustrating the slide movement of the suspension device 5430 in time series. . For ease of understanding, the illustration of the base member 410 is omitted, and the auxiliary member 450 is indicated by an imaginary line.

  When starting the suspension device 5430 from the extended position, the drive device 464 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) (same as the state of FIG. 65 (a)), and the attitude maintaining pin 465a is operated to transmit the transmission member. By swinging 5437, the moving rack 5436 can be slid, and the moving rack 5436 can be moved to a position where it engages with the transmission gear 443 (see FIG. 67B).

  From the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the drive motor 441 is driven and the transmission gear 443 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear, whereby the movable rack 5436 is moved upward (see FIG. 68 (a)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 68 (a), the lower end of the guide elongated hole 5436a is brought into contact with the locking convex portion 5431b, so that the transmission gear 443 pulls up the suspension device 5430 through the movable rack 5436. The In the state shown in FIG. 68A, the gear teeth formed on the upper surface of the movable rack 5436 and the gear teeth of the rack gear formed on the upper surface of the slide main body 431 are in the front-rear direction (FIG. a) The lower end of the guide long hole 5436a and the locking convex portion 5431b are aligned at a position overlapping in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface).

  From the state shown in FIG. 68 (a), by further rotating the transmission gear 443 clockwise in the rear view (FIG. 68 (a) clockwise), the transmission gear 443 and the movement rack are moved in the middle of moving the movement rack 5436 upward. The state where the transmission gear 443 is meshed only with the rack gear disposed on the upper surface of the suspension device 5430 through the state where the rack gear disposed on the upper surface of the suspension device 5430 and the rack gear 5430 is simultaneously meshed ( The movable rack 5436 and the transmission gear 443 are disengaged). Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the suspension device 5430 via the transmission gear 443.

  In the state where the transmission gear 443 is disengaged from the movable rack 5436, the position of the movable rack 5436 is not limited, and the gear teeth of the movable rack 5436 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 68A). And the gear teeth on the upper surface of the suspension device 5430 may be displaced (see FIG. 68B). In the present embodiment, at least when the locking projection 5431b is disposed at the upper end of the guide elongated hole 5436a (see FIG. 68 (a)) and when disposed at the lower end (see FIG. 67 (a)). Thus, the positions of the gear teeth of the movable rack 5436 and the gear teeth of the upper side surface of the suspension device 5430 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 68 (a)). As a result, when the suspension device 5430 is pulled together with the movable rack 5436 (see FIG. 68A), and in a state where the movable rack 5436 is pressed in the direction of gravity (see FIG. 67A), the transmission gear. 443 can be changed from the state of meshing with the movable rack 5436 to the state of meshing with the rack gear on the upper surface of the hanging device 5430 without resistance due to the engagement of the gear teeth.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, the first slide operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the terminal fixing portions 4417a are disposed at both ends in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417, thereby suppressing the movement width of the arm member 4430b, is described. In the first slide operation unit 6400, an engagement wall 6418 that contacts the bent arm portion 433 of the arm member 5430b in the left-right direction is disposed on the front side of the base member 6410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 69 (a), 69 (b), 70 (a), and 70 (b) show the first slide in the sixth embodiment illustrating the manner in which the suspension device 6430 moves to the retracted position in time series. It is a partial front view of the operation unit 6400.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the suspension device 6430 is movable in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction of the driven member 6430a to which the driving force of the driving device 440 is transmitted and the driven member 6430a. And an arm member 6430b having a movement width defining convex portion 4433c that is connected to the driven member 6430a and is inserted through the wide guide hole 4417.

  The driven member 6430a includes a guide recess 6431a that is recessed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the driven member 6430a so that the guided protrusion 6433b of the arm member 6430b can be received, and the guide recess 6431a is recessed. Further, the upper bottom portion includes an upper bottom concave portion 6431a1 that is recessed toward the left in the sliding direction of the driven member 6430a (lower left in FIG. 69 (a)).

  The arm member 6430b includes a guided convex portion 6433b that protrudes from the upper side surface, and the guided convex portion 6433b includes an accommodation convex portion 6433b1 formed in a size that can be accommodated in the guide concave portion 6431a. .

  In a state where the housing convex portion 6433b1 is housed in the upper bottom concave portion 6431a1, the arm member 6430b is restricted from moving in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the driven member 6430a (see FIG. 70D). .

  The base member 6410 includes an engagement wall 6418 disposed so as to be able to contact the arm member 6430b in the left-right direction.

  The engagement wall 6418 is formed in a square shape when viewed from the front, and the side surface on the right side of the arm member 6430b is inclined upward as the engagement wall 6418 is moved as the arm member 6430b is moved to the retracted position. (FIG. 69 (b) lower side surface).

  That is, as the arm member 6430b approaches the engagement wall 6418, the arm member 6430b approaches the driven member 6430a along the inclination of the engagement wall 6418 and the suspension device 6430 is disposed at least in the retracted position. Relative movement with respect to the driven member 6430a can be made impossible. Therefore, the process in which the arm member 6430b is pressed against the driven member 6430a can be moderated, and a load generated between the arm member 6430b and the driven member 6430a can be suppressed.

  The position at which the lower side surface of the driven member 6430a and the upper side surface of the arm member 6430b abut by sliding the driven member 6430a from the state shown in FIG. 69 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). The angle of inclination of the engagement wall 6418 is defined in such a manner that the arm member 6430b can be pushed up to the end.

  That is, assuming that the side surface of the arm member 6430b reaches the deepest part of the engagement wall 6418 (the right back part in FIG. 70 (a)) in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the contact position P61 in FIG. 69 (b). To the contact position P62 in FIG. 70A, the lengths of the components in the direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction of the driven member 6430a are the driven member 6430a and the arm member 6430b in FIG. 69A. The shape of the engagement wall 6418 is defined in a manner that is equal to the separation distance D61.

  When the arm member 6430b presses the driven member 6430a in the state shown in FIG. 70A, friction is generated between the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) of the driven member 6430a and the guide rib 413. The arrangement of the arm member 6430b can be stabilized.

  From the state shown in FIG. 69 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the left side of FIG. 69 (b) on the left side of FIG. 69 (b) of the guide recess 6431a is the left side of FIG. Slides. In the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the housing convex portion 6433b1 and the upper bottom concave portion 6431a1 are arranged to face each other, and the driven member 6430a is further slid in the upper right direction, whereby the housing convex portion 6433b1 is moved to the upper bottom concave portion 6431a1. (See FIG. 70 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in a state in which the suspension device 6430 is disposed at the retracted position, the arm member 6430b is locked to the engagement wall 6418, and the accommodation convex portion 6433b is accommodated in the upper bottom concave portion 6431a. The

  Therefore, when the suspending device 6430 is disposed at the retracted position, the load received by the arm member 6430b due to the reaction caused by the rotation of the eccentric member 3467 (see FIG. 51) with respect to the sliding operation direction of the suspending device 6430. The load of the component in the vertical direction can be distributed between the engagement wall 6418 and the upper bottom recess 6431a. Thereby, it can suppress that the engaging wall 6418 or the upper bottom recessed part 6431a is damaged.

  The wide guide hole 4417 provided in the base member 6410 is configured as a simple long hole by omitting the terminal fixing portion 4417a and the prevention convex portion 4417b (see FIG. 59).

  Next, the first slide operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the arm member 4430b is prevented from running backward by the prevention convex portion 4417b fixed to the wide guide hole 4417 has been described, but the first slide operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment is A locking member 7418 that swings is disposed inside the wide guide hole 4417. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  71 (a), 71 (b) and 71 (c) are partial rear views of the first slide operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. 71A, 71B, and 71C, the portions of the driven member 4430a and the arm member 4430b that are shielded by the base member 7410 are indicated by hidden lines, and the wide guide hole 4417 is illustrated. The terminal fixing portion 4417a and the prevention convex portion 4417b (see FIG. 59) are omitted, and a simple long hole is configured.

  71A illustrates a state in which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c is in contact with the lower surface of the wide guide hole 4417. FIG. 71B illustrates the arm member 4430b from the state illustrated in FIG. 71A. 71 (b) moves in the upper left direction, and the state in which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c contacts the locking member 7418 is shown. In FIG. 71 (c), the arm member 4430b is moved from the state shown in FIG. 71 (a). 71 (c) moves in the upper right direction, and a state in which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c contacts the locking member 7418 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the locking member 7418 is an L-shaped member when viewed from the front and configured to be swingable about the swing shaft 7418a, and is a first arm portion 7418b on the left side when viewed from the back. This is longer than the arm on the right side when viewed from the rear, and is normally in the posture shown in FIG. 71A (the posture in which the first arm portion 7418b hangs downward) due to the load of gravity. The arm portion on the opposite side of the first arm portion 7418b is brought into contact with a rib projecting on the back surface side of the base member 7410, so that the locking member 7418 is in the back surface in the state of FIG. Swinging counterclockwise is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the movement width defining convex portion 4433c comes into contact with the locking member 7418 as it moves in the upper left direction of FIG. 71 (b), the locking member 7418 swings, The movement resistance of the arm member 4430b can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), when the movement width defining convex portion 4433c contacts the locking member 7418 as it moves in the upper right direction in FIG. 71 (c), the locking member 7418 swings. For example, when the suspension device 4430 moves in the upper left direction in FIG. 71 (c), the arm member 4430 b receives a load in the lower right direction and may move backward. Reverse running can be prevented by bringing the movement width defining convex portion 4433c into contact.

  In the present embodiment, the locking member 7418 is disposed so as to protrude in the region inside the wide guide hole 4417, whereby the space for disposing the wide guide hole 4417 and the locking member 7418 can be suppressed.

  Note that the locking member 7418 is configured to be detachable from the base member 7410 individually. Therefore, for example, even when the first arm portion 7418b is broken by a load received from the movement restricting convex portion 4433c, it is not necessary to replace all of the plurality of locking members 7418. Therefore, replacement cost (cost of necessary members) can be suppressed.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the arm member 4430b is prevented from running backward by the prevention convex portion 4417b fixed to the wide guide hole 4417 has been described, but the first slide operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment is While the wide guide hole 4417 is slidable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417, a plurality of movable pieces 8418 whose movement is restricted in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 are arranged above the wide guide hole 4417. It is arranged along the side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  72 (a), 72 (b) and 72 (c) are partial rear views of the first slide operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. 72A, 72B, and 72C, the portions of the driven member 4430a and the arm member 4430b that are shielded by the base member 8410 are indicated by hidden lines, and the wide guide hole 4417 is illustrated. The terminal fixing portion 4417a and the prevention convex portion 4417b (see FIG. 59) are omitted, and a simple long hole is configured.

  72A illustrates a state in which the movement width defining convex portion 4433c is in contact with the lower side surface of the wide guide hole 4417. FIG. 72B illustrates the arm member 4430b from the state illustrated in FIG. 72A. 72 (b) is moved in the upper left direction, and a state in which the movable width defining convex portion 4433c is in contact with the movable piece 8418 is illustrated. In FIG. 72 (c), from the state illustrated in FIG. 72 (b), the arm member 4430b is illustrated. 72C moves in the lower right direction, and a state in which the moving width defining convex portion 4433c comes into contact with the movable piece 8418 is illustrated.

  The movable piece 8418 is disposed on the back surface side of the base member 8410, and a plurality of movable pieces 8418 are arranged in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 and are movable in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417.

  More specifically, each movable piece 8418 is a member that restricts the movement of the wide guide hole 4417 in the extending direction by being sandwiched between a pair of guide walls 8418a that are provided as a pair on the back side of the base member 8410. The first side surface 8418b, which is the left side surface (side surface facing the descending arm member 4430b) as viewed from the rear, is configured perpendicular to the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417 and is opposite to the first side surface 8418b. A second side surface 8418c which is the side surface of the wide guide hole 4417 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the second side surface 8418c and the movement width defining convex portion 4433c abut, the movable piece 8418 can be pushed to the outside of the wide guide hole 4417, and the arm member The movement resistance of 4430b can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), when the first side surface 8418b and the movement width defining convex portion 4433c abut, the movable piece 8418 cannot be pushed to the outside of the wide guide hole 4417 ( Since a component in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417 does not occur in the load on the movable piece 8418), the movement width defining convex portion 4433 c is dammed to the movable piece 8418, and the arm member 4430 b extends along the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417. Moving.

  Accordingly, for example, after the arm member 4430b is moved to the vicinity of the upper side surface of the wide guide hole 4417 by the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 (see FIG. 51), the arm member 4430b is moved along the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417. Moving downward (in a state where the arm member 4430b is moving upward), the reverse movement of the arm member 4430b) is suppressed.

  In this embodiment, one movable piece 8418 is pushed in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417 so that the movement width defining convex portion is between the movable piece 8418 adjacent to the pushed movable piece 8418. Since 4433c is accommodated, the effect of preventing reverse running of the arm member 4430b can be achieved regardless of where the arm member 4430b is disposed in the extending direction of the wide guide hole 4417.

  The movable piece 8418 is configured to be detachable from the base member 8410 individually. Therefore, for example, even if the movable piece 8418 is missing due to the load received from the movement restricting convex portion 4433c, it is not necessary to replace all the plurality of movable pieces 8418. Therefore, replacement cost (cost of necessary members) can be suppressed.

The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. In 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, although the case where the speed which drives the suspension member 430 was controlled according to the load given to the suspension member 430 was demonstrated, the 1st slide operation | movement unit 9400 in 9th Embodiment is
In a state in which the drive motor 441 is constantly driven, a transmission state in which the driving force is transmitted to the suspension member 9430 and a non-transmission state in which the driving force is not transmitted are periodically switched. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  73 (a) to 73 (c) and FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (c) show the first slide operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment illustrating the slide operation of the suspension member 9430 in time series. FIG. In addition, a mode that the transmission gear 9443 of the drive device 9440 makes one rotation is illustrated between FIG. 73 (a) and FIG. 74 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the transmission gear 9443 is disposed on the complete gear portion 9443a that meshes with the drive gear 442, and on the back side of the complete gear portion 9443a (the front side in FIG. 73 (a)). An incomplete gear portion 9443b, and the complete gear portion 9443a and the incomplete gear portion 9443b are configured in two layers in the axial direction.

  The incomplete gear portion 9443b includes an arc portion 9443b1 in which teeth are not formed, and a meshing portion 9443b2 in which gear teeth are formed adjacent to the arc portion 9443b1.

  The suspension member 9430 is configured on the upper surface of the slide main body portion 431 as a rack gear portion 9431a in which a rack gear engaged with the engagement portion 9443b2 is formed, and an arc having the same curvature radius as that of the arc portion 9443b1. Arc portion 9431b. Note that the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 9431a are configured with a number of teeth that is one less than the number of gear teeth of the meshing portion 9443b2.

  In FIG. 73B, from the state of FIG. 73A, the transmission gear 9443 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back, and the gear teeth at the end of the rack gear portion 9431a mesh with the gear teeth at the end of the meshing portion 9443b2. The state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 73 (c), the transmission gear 9443 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear from the state of FIG. 73 (b), the meshing between the rack gear portion 9431a and the meshing portion 9443b2 is released, and the arc portions 9431b, 9443b1. A state in which the members start to slide is illustrated.

  In the state of FIG. 73 (c), the arc portions 9431b and 9443b1 are fitted to each other (the arc portion 9443b1 contacts the arc portion 9431b from both directions of the sliding operation of the suspension member 9430). Can be prevented from moving in the sliding movement direction.

  In FIG. 74 (a), the transmission gear 9443 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the back from the state of FIG. 73 (b), and the gear teeth at the end of the rack gear portion 9431a and the gear teeth at the end of the meshing portion 9443b2. A state just before the start of meshing is illustrated.

  During the period from FIG. 73C to FIG. 74A, the driving force of the driving device 9440 is not transmitted to the suspension member 9430. Since the non-transmission period is a period in which the transmission gear 9443 is rotated by about 90 degrees, in the present embodiment, the drive device 9440 is performed while the transmission gear 9443 is rotated by about 270 degrees (a period three times the non-transmission period). Is transmitted to the suspension member 9430.

  In FIG. 74 (b), from the state of FIG. 74 (a), the transmission gear 9443 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back, and the gear teeth at the end of the rack gear portion 9431a mesh with the gear teeth at the end of the meshing portion 9443b2. The starting state is illustrated.

  FIG. 74 (c) shows a state in which the transmission gear 9443 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, and the transmission gear 9443 is in the same phase as FIG. 73 (a) from the state of FIG. 74 (b).

In the present embodiment, since the driving force of the driving device 9440 is not transmitted to the suspension member 9430 in a state where the arc portions 9431b and 9443b1 are fitted to each other,
When a load applied to the suspension member 9430 (for example, a load due to the centrifugal force FO1 or counter torque of the eccentric member 3467 (see FIG. 51)) is directed in the opposite direction to the moving direction of the suspension member 9430, the arc portion 9431b. , 9443b1 can be controlled so that the load is applied along the sliding direction of the suspension member 9430 from the suspension member 9430 to the transmission gear 9443.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to perform control to switch the output voltage of the drive device 9440, the control of the drive device 9440 can be simplified, and at the same time, the durability of the drive device 9440 and the suspension member 9430 can be improved.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the force generated from the eccentric member 3467 is canceled by the reaction force when the moving base member 465 of the tilting member 460 and the gravity center G02 of the second cover member 466 slide is described. In the first slide operation unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment, the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 10465 of the tilting member 10460 and the second cover member 10466 is switched to the left and right with the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 as a boundary. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 75A to FIG. 75D are partial front views of the first slide operation unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment. 75 (a) to 75 (d), the entire tilting member 10460 is illustrated, the hanging member 430 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line, and other portions are not illustrated.

  The moving member 10460 includes a moving base member 10465 and a second cover member 10466 that slide in synchronization with the eccentric member 3467. The moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 are configured to be long in the sliding direction, and the moving width thereof is also longer than that in each of the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 75A shows a state in which the tip of the eccentric member 3467 is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 during the rotation of the eccentric member 3467. In this state, the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 is disposed on the left side of the hanging cylinder 435 (left side in FIG. 75 (a)). Therefore, the force caused by the center of gravity G02 with the hanging cylinder 435 as the rotation axis and the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 are in a direction that cancels each other. Thereby, the posture change of the tilting member 10460 can be suppressed.

  In FIG. 75B, the eccentric member 3467 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 75A, and the tip of the eccentric member 3467 faces the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466. In addition, a state in which a straight line hanging vertically from the center of gravity G02 passes through the hanging cylinder 435 is illustrated. In this case, since the force due to gravity applied to the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 is not applied in the rotation direction with the hanging cylinder 435 as the rotation axis, the tilting member 10460 is caused to move in the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467. It can suppress that it is urged | biased by.

  75 (c), the eccentric member 3467 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 75 (a), and the sliding direction of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 in the middle of the rotation of the eccentric member 3467 The figure shows a state in which the tip of the eccentric member 3467 is oriented in the vertical direction. In this state, the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 is disposed on the right side (FIG. 75 (c) right side) of the hanging cylinder 435. Therefore, the force caused by the center of gravity G02 with the hanging cylinder 435 as the rotation axis and the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467 are in a direction that cancels each other. Thereby, the posture change of the tilting member 10460 can be suppressed.

  75D, the eccentric member 3467 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the front in the state of FIG. 75C, and the tip of the eccentric member 3467 is opposite to the center of gravity G02 of the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466. A state in which a straight line that is directed in the vertical direction from the center of gravity G02 and passes through the hanging cylinder 435 is illustrated. In this case, since the force due to gravity applied to the moving base member 10465 and the second cover member 10466 is not applied in the rotation direction with the hanging cylinder 435 as the rotation axis, the tilting member 10460 is caused to move in the direction of the centrifugal force FO1 of the eccentric member 3467. It can suppress that it is urged | biased by.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is slid into the standing holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a rotatable roller may be disposed on the changing sliding portion 333 and the roller may roll on the upright holes 316 and 2316. Thereby, the resistance which generate | occur | produces at the time of the attitude | position change of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward the vicinity of the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be rapidly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of change in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (rapidly or loosened).

  In each of the above embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward the vicinity of the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 331 and the collar member of the standing member 330 and the base member 310 is gradually reduced from the vicinity of the lower end of the standing hole 316 to the vicinity of the upper end, Good. In this case, resistance applied to the standing member 330 when the arm member 320 starts from the retracted position toward the extended position is suppressed, and wobbling of the standing member 330 is suppressed in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. can do.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end toward the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction in diameter perpendicular to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed differently on the left and right with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface (right side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is a portion formed on the upper side of the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. In this case, the arm member 320 is a portion that is positively contacted when the arm member 320 slightly moves in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft. By greatly reducing the reduction degree of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, the arm member 320 can be smoothly swung in the protruding direction.

  On the other hand, the left side surface (the left side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is in contact with the arm member 320 when it is swung from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 is tilted forward. Therefore, the degree of contraction of the groove is moderated until it reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, and is formed rapidly in the vicinity of the upper end, whereby the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position. Can be suppressed. That is, the sliding portion 326 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left side surface of the guide hole 315 when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 is tilted forward. Resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced, and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

  Note that the same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 by the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 as compared to the vicinity of the upper end, the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position from the start. The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be made smooth.

  Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with that in the vicinity of the lower end, the arm member 320 is arranged to be A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflection members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are rotated at the same time has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation timing may be shifted for each reflection member 520, or the rotation speed may be shifted. Thereby, the reflection direction of the light irradiated from the light source and reflected by the reflecting member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflection member 520 is rotated by the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshing with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 has been described. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt, and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belt further rotates while the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slip occurs between the rotating belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflecting member 520 is suppressed. Therefore, damage to the reflecting member 520 can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the expansion gear 523a is formed on the rotation gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed with an interval between them. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth interval may be formed on the rotation gear 523.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the reflecting member 520 may be formed from a transparent resin material. In this case, since the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source regardless of whether the reflecting member 520 is in the closed state or the open state, the player can visually recognize the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long period of time. Can do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one slide member 720 is slid by being pushed by the other slide member 720 out of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to be always driven by an independent drive motor.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly contact the main body portions 741 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an elastic member such as rubber or a coil spring may be disposed on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be reduced as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 protrude is described. It is not limited. For example, the visually recognized shape is not limited to “heart”, and may be “star”, “fish”, “car”, and the like. Further, different shapes may be formed so as to be visible when the slide members 720 and 740 have different degrees of overhang. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one second slide member 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 out of the pair of second slide members 740 is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, it can be moved in the pulling direction by attaching a magnet to the contact portion of the second slide member 740. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides one of the second slide members 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, the motor to be driven can be switched according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted, of the longitudinal ends of the decorative portion 723. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other can be reduced, so that the burden on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 are contacted can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, the pair of slide members 720 are moved when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid in a contact state. The effect of visually recognizing as a unit can be made remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are concealed by the front cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 that are separated from each other are viewed in a coordinated manner, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the carriage unit 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed larger in one first slide member 720 and smaller in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the rotating body group 722b having a small diameter can be sandwiched between the rotating body group 722b having a large diameter and the first slide shaft rod S1. Thereby, the effect which brakes the rotating body group 722b can be improved because the rotating body group 722b contact | abuts.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the sliding direction of the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 3400 is configured to descend from the retracted position toward the extended position, but is not limited thereto. Not. For example, you may comprise in the aspect which raises toward a protruding position from a retracted position. In this case, a driving force for stopping the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 at the retracted position can be eliminated.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first slide member 2720 stops when the detection holes 2721c are formed at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the center, and the other end of the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720). A plurality of positions can be formed. At this time, by changing the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction, the positions of the first slide members 2720 can be detected at a plurality of locations in the detection period of the detection device 2716.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously drilled along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is moved during the movement of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined from the time interval during which the transmitted light is blocked. Further, by changing the number of circular detection holes 2721c for each longitudinal position of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the central portion), the transmission of the detection device 2716 during the movement of the first slide member 2720 is performed. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected based on the number of times light is blocked.

  In the second embodiment, after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position, the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by causing at least one first slide member 2720 to run backward. And the impact at the time of contact can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be provided corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is disposed on the base member 2710 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the detection device 2716 may be disposed on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driving device 464 for driving the eccentric member 3467 of the tilting member 3460 is disposed on the tilting member 3460 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the driving device 464 may be arranged on the base member 410 and configured to rotate the eccentric member 3467 by a transmission mechanism such as a link mechanism, a gear mesh, or a belt. In this case, the weight of the tilting member 3460 can be reduced, and the load on the drive motor 441 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the width of the intermediate portion of the wide guide hole 4417 is uniformly wide has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a pair of prevention protrusions 4417b and a pair of protrusions 4417b adjacent to the prevention protrusions 4417b may be configured to have a narrow width. In this case, when the prevention convex portion 4417b and the movement width regulating convex portion 4433c overlap in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417, the arm member 4430b can be rattled in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417, and the prevention convex portion 4417b. In the range in which the width of the wide guide hole 4417 is narrowed and the width of the wide guide hole 4417 of the arm member 4430b is reduced, rattling in the width direction can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to change the operation mode of the arm member 4430b along the vertical direction of the wide guide hole 4417 while the suspension member 4430 is slid.

  For example, the suspension member 4430 is stopped at a position where the prevention convex portion 4417b and the movement width defining convex portion 4433c overlap in the width direction of the wide guide hole 4417, and the eccentric member 3467 is rotated to rattle the arm member 4430b. Accordingly, the tilting member 3460 can be rattled (vibrated) along with it, and the vibration of the tilting member 3460 can be used for production.

  Further, for example, the suspension member 4430 is stopped in a range in which the width of the wide guide hole 4417 is narrowed by being shifted from the prevention convex portion 4417b, and the eccentric member 3467 is rotated, so that the arm member 4430b has the width of the wide guide hole 4417. Shaking (vibrating) in the direction can be suppressed, and the posture of the tilting member 3460 can be stabilized.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the prevention convex portion 4417b is formed integrally with the wide guide hole 4417 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the prevention convex portion 4417b may be attached to and detached from the wide guide hole 4417 and the position thereof may be adjusted. In this case, after determining the mode of rotation of the eccentric member 3467 and movement of the suspension member 3460, the prevention convex portion 4417 can be attached later to the position where the suspension member 4360 exhibits the reverse running prevention action. The mold of member 4410 can be designed and manufactured before determining the manner of rotation of eccentric member 3467 and movement of suspension member 3460.

  Moreover, the prevention convex part 4417 may be comprised so that each convex part may be removable, respectively, and the some convex part may be comprised so that it can remove. If each convex part can be individually attached and detached, after changing the mode of rotation of the eccentric member 3467 and movement of the hanging member 3460, the position where the hanging member 3460 runs backward is changed. However, the reverse running prevention effect can be achieved by rearranging each prevention convex portion 4417 at a position to run backward. When each convex part is unitized, the work man-hour of attachment / detachment and position adjustment can be suppressed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described in which the engagement wall 6418 is formed in a square shape in front view formed by a pair of straight lines, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shape of the engagement wall 6418 may be a “substantially square shape” configured by connecting a pair of curved lines that protrude and extend inward (sides facing each other) at one end. In this case, when the arm member 6430b and the driven member 6430a come close to the engaging wall 6418 and the approach speed is constant, the arm member 6430b and the driven member 6430a are engaged. The closer to the joint wall 6418, the gentler the proximity speed of the arm member 6430b and the driven member 6430a can be. Thereby, it can suppress that the arm member 6430b and the to-be-driven member 6430a collide vigorously, and are damaged.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of a moving member that is moved only by an urging force>
An urging device that generates an elastic urging force in one direction, and the display region of the liquid crystal display device from a retreat position that is located outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device by the urging force generated by the urging device A movable member formed to be movable to a predetermined position located on the front side of the head, a position restricting device formed to be able to restrict movement of the moving member at the retracted position, and release for releasing the restriction by the position restricting device A gaming machine A1 comprising the apparatus.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving motor that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the moving member is moved by motor driving, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movement member formed to be movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the biasing force in one direction is restricted (stopped) by the position restricting device at the retracted position. ). And when the restriction | limiting by a position control apparatus is cancelled | released by a cancellation | release apparatus, a movement member will be started to move by the urging | biasing force accumulate | stored by arrange | positioning in a retracted position.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed at the target value from the start of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at a high speed.

  Examples of the urging device include a device that uses the repulsive force of a magnet, a device that uses spring elasticity, etc., and examples of the releasing device include a driving device that applies a driving force that mechanically moves the position regulating device, Examples thereof include a device for canceling electromagnetic adsorption of the position regulating device.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving at least the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the releasing device is configured by the driving device. A gaming machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is necessary in order to repeatedly perform an effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device for generating a driving force is required. However, since the space for disposing the moving member and the driving device is limited inside the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the space for disposing the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, since the release device is constituted by the drive device, the drive device is released from the restriction of the moving member and the retracted position from the predetermined position of the moving member. Can also be used to return to Therefore, the arrangement space of the release device and the drive device can be suppressed as compared with the case where the drive device is prepared separately.

  In addition, after the moving member has moved from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeatedly performed.

  Examples of the driving device include a motor and an air cylinder.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the base end side, and the position restricting device is protruded from the first rotating body rotated about the first axis, and the first rotating body. And a pin member positioned eccentrically with respect to the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member on the base end side of the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the retracted position. A direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is orthogonal to a direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is formed in such a manner that the direction is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft and the pin member formed on the base end side of the moving member.

  Therefore, when the moving member is moved to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. Thereby, for example, a structure in which the moving member is detected at the retracted position and the position restricting device is operated to restrict the moving member becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotation shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member is brought to the retracted position even if there is no driving force such as a driving motor. It is possible to secure a large force to regulate. Therefore, a large urging force accumulated in the urging device can be secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at a high speed can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, and at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position, a straight line that connects the pin member and the first axis of the position regulating device. The position restricting device is engaged with the driving device and a driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the pin member is formed to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts to rotate from the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion Since the directions coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the rotation of the first rotating body is started.

  Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device with respect to the moving member, it is necessary when shifting the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member (rotating the position restricting device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device are engaged with each other and a non-engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device are disengaged are formed. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the disengaged state is formed at least when the moving member starts from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, so that the resistance applied to the position regulating device As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance at the start of the moving member. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engagement state between the driving device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counter the urging force of the urging device, the high speed at the start of the moving member can be ensured, so the degree of freedom in designing the urging device can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

  In addition, as an aspect which forms a non-engagement state with a position control apparatus and a drive device, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position control device, and the gear meshed with the gear is partially The second rotating body formed on the driving device is disposed in the driving device, and when the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the gear engagement between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, A second rotating body in which a magnetic body is formed on a side surface of one rotating body and a magnetic body to be attracted to the magnetic body is partially formed is disposed in the driving device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The case where a drive device is transmitted by suction is exemplified.

  More specifically, when the first rotating state and the second rotating body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is partially formed. Thus, the position restricting device and the drive device form an engaged state in the region where the gear is engaged, and the position restricting device and the drive are operated in a region where the gear is disengaged (region where the gear is not formed). The device forms a disengaged state.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game machine includes an effect member that is pivotally supported by the moving member and arranged at a front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at least at a predetermined position. The member extends from the base end side to the swing end side which is an end portion on the opposite side of the base end side, and is formed in a mode in which the extending direction is a longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal The display member is pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in the first direction longer than a length in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the first direction is set along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is a tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. And one of the first directions Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the production member is arranged at the retracted position, the production member changes its first direction to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is assumed that the attitude is in line. Therefore, even when it is difficult to form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be easy to install.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged at a predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction is the effect end. Since the projection extends to the opposite side of the retracted position, the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used to produce an effect.

  An example of a case where it is difficult to form a sufficient space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the liquid crystal display device is, for example, a case where a retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Is done.

  The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the posture of the effect member is caused by the first projecting portion being guided by the first guiding portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the change in the orientation of the effect member occurs when the projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  That is, for example, in the case where the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted as the moving member is moved up, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of moving the moving member up Depending on the design of the first guide part, it can be arbitrarily selected whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending movement end.

  The first guide part is exemplified by a slot formed so as to penetrate and having a longitudinal direction, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As an aspect, the aspect in which the first protrusion is slid on the first guide part, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the first protrusion, and the rotor is rolled on the first guide part, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circular portion extending along the circle, wherein the concentric circular portion is formed on the predetermined position side, and the posture changing portion is formed on the retracted position side. Game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of movement as a unit.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end of the effect member and the end of the effect The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the change in the posture of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along a circle centering on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided through the concentric circle portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the effect The effect member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the member and the shaft support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, a change in posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the concentric circle part is formed on the predetermined position side, the player can visually recognize the effect member and the moving member as a unit over a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle part extending along the circle, wherein the posture changing part is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of movement as a unit.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end of the effect member and the end of the effect The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the change in the posture of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along a circle centering on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided to the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and The effect member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the effect member and the pivot support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, a change in posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the effect member can be quickly changed while the effect member is visually recognized by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the game machine includes a second guide portion that is formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extends along a rotation trajectory of the moving member. The member includes at least one second projecting portion guided by the second guide portion, and the second projecting portion is formed integrally with the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. In this case, the second projecting portion is brought into contact with one end of the second guide portion.

  Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, the motor cannot be stopped and the momentum of the moving member cannot be reduced as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. A mechanism needs to be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second projecting portion contacts the end of the second guide portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

  In addition, since the second protrusion is guided by the second guide that extends along the rotation trajectory of the moving member, the second guide and the second protrusion optimize the rotation of the moving member. The wobbling of the moving member in the swing axis direction can be suppressed.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member can be brought into contact with each other to serve as a stopper, but since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion There is a problem with strength. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally projected from the moving member, the strength problem is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

  In addition, by forming a plurality of sets of the second projecting portion and the second guide portion, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches a predetermined position. Thereby, durability of a 2nd protrusion part can be improved. Further, examples of the second guide portion include a slot formed so as to penetrate and have a longitudinal direction, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As an aspect, the aspect in which the second protrusion is slid on the second guide, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the second protrusion, and the rotor is rolled on the second guide, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction at the one end portion than at the other end portion which is the end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion. A gaming machine A11 that is formed in a manner in which the width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that the groove width is reduced at one end compared to the other end. That is, since a large gap is formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, it is possible to suppress resistance when the moving member is started. Moreover, the clearance gap formed by the 2nd protrusion part and 2nd guide part when a moving member is arrange | positioned in a predetermined position can be made small, and the wobble of a 2nd protrusion part can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end portion of the second guide portion to the other end portion, or the second guide portion. A case where the groove width is abruptly reduced at a part of (a degree of reduction of the groove width is formed by at least two kinds) is exemplified.

  In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through-hole, the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide portion, and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide portion is perforated. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is formed in such a manner that one end is reduced as compared with the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, in addition, when the moving member is disposed at the overhang position, it is possible to suppress the moving member from wobbling particularly in the drilling direction of the second guide portion.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the second guide portion has a small-diameter side surface extending from the one end to the other end. The gap with the second protrusion is reduced over the vicinity of the part, and the gap with the second protrusion is increased at the other end compared to the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is The gap between the first protrusion and the second protrusion is reduced at the one end, and the second protrusion extends from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that the gap is increased.

  According to the gaming machine A12, since the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by the upward movement, the moving member swings when the moving member is swinged from the retracted position to the predetermined position. When moving slightly in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the shaft, the second projecting portion tends to abut on the small diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is reduced in the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. Thereby, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position can be smoothed.

  Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second projecting portion is likely to abut on the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is reduced only when the moving member is swung to a predetermined position. Thereby, the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive device can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a gap between the main body portion extending from the base end side to the swing end side and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. When the direction member is provided with a decorative portion that is spaced apart on the front side, and the orientation member changes in posture, at least one of the one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end is the main body portion and the A gaming machine A13, which is stored between the decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effect member changes the posture, at least one of both ends in the first direction of the effect member is the main body part and the decoration part. It is stored with a slight gap between and. Therefore, when the production member changes its posture, if the production member becomes largely movable in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body for some reason, the main body and the decoration serve as a guide that prevents the movement. The large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be restricted.

  According to this, in the case where the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

  In the gaming machine A13, the movement trajectory of any part of the effect member and the movement trajectory of any part of the decoration member are within the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and the fluctuation of the effect member. A gaming machine A14 that overlaps when viewed in the direction of the dynamic axis.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably stored between the main body portion and the decoration portion in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, compared with the case where the production member is stored between the main body part and the decoration part for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case of preventing the displacement in the front-rear direction with the fixed plate, A guide function for restricting the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction from an earlier stage can be exhibited.

  Thereby, when a plurality of moving units are stacked, not only the interference between the moving members of the moving units outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, but also the movement units inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Interference between moving members can be prevented.

<An example of a technical idea for suppressing wobbling of the moving member>
A moving member formed to be slidable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, an effect member disposed on the moving member, and the effect member And a second driving device that generates a driving force for driving the game machine, wherein the retracted position is a position spaced apart from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance in a lateral direction of the gaming machine and from the predetermined position. The effect member is a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance upward in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position is a moving end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B1 that is driven.

  Here, a moving member formed so as to be slidable and an effect member which is arranged on the moving member and is driven independently of the moving member are slid in the horizontal direction. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2012-085811 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the effect member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member in a predetermined position, the effect member There is a problem that it is necessary to continue to apply a force resisting the force due to the reaction of the drive to the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position that is the moving end of the moving member is formed obliquely below the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second driving device at the predetermined position and the moving member receives the reaction force, the force due to the weight of the moving member works toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. Therefore, even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is unnecessary, the moving member can be maintained at a predetermined position.

  The longitudinal direction of the gaming machine means a direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the lateral direction of the gaming machine means a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. To do.

  As a method for transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method and a method of attaching a belt to the proximal end side of the moving member and winding the belt.

  In the gaming machine B1, an auxiliary member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane in which the moving member slides, and the moving member is a liquid crystal display at least in the predetermined position. A projecting portion formed inward of a display area of the apparatus, and in a state where the moving member is disposed at least at the predetermined position, the projecting portion is perpendicular to a plane in which the moving member slides. A game machine B2 which is brought into contact with the auxiliary member when swinging to the right.

  Here, since the protruding portion of the moving member is formed to protrude inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position, it prevents interference with other objects. Therefore, it is required to suppress the swing in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at the predetermined position. In the disposed state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member are brought into contact with each other. Therefore, the wobbling of the overhanging portion can be suppressed, and the collision between the other accessory and the overhanging portion can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B2, a gaming machine B3, wherein the overhang portion has a weaker base side rigidity than a tip side.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the rigidity on the base side is weakened compared to the leading end side of the overhanging portion, so that wobble generated at the leading end of the overhanging portion is The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

  Here, examples of the method for weakening the rigidity include a case where the overhang portion is formed of a resin material partially different in rigidity by two-color molding, and a case where the thickness of the overhang portion is partially changed. .

  When the overhanging portion is formed with a thin thickness in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, the moving member can be prevented from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

  Further, when the base side of the overhanging part is formed to be thinner than the tip side, the wobbling at the front end side of the overhanging part is converted into a bending deformation with the base side of the overhanging part as a fulcrum. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the horizontal movement of the moving member in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides on the base side of the overhanging portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end which is the end opposite to the one end is a display area of the liquid crystal display device When the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Thus, another moving member is disposed on the same layer as the moving member, and when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the other moving member protrudes inward of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to produce a variety of effects in a limited space.

  In addition, as a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft, or a mode in which the protruding portion is inserted into the long hole and the protruding portion is guided through the long hole. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B4, the overhang portion extends along a direction from the shaft support portion of the one end portion of the auxiliary member toward the other end portion in a state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5 comprising an extended contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member includes the abutting portion, and the abutting portion of the auxiliary member is in a state where the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the axial support part of one edge part to the other edge part. Therefore, in the state where the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position, an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact can be secured by the contact portion.

  In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extending tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip of the hand portion, and the movement As the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position of the overhang portion and the auxiliary member moves to the tip side of the hand portion.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member is disposed at the hand portion of the overhanging portion, and the extension member and the auxiliary member are moved as the moving member slides to the retracted position. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand portion. For this reason, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the protruding amount (the protruding distance) of the protruding portion that extends to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference. Thereby, even if the leading end side of the overhanging portion is wobbled by driving the effect member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from the stage where the wobble is small. Thereby, when a moving member is arrange | positioned in a retracted position, the effect which suppresses wobbling in the direction perpendicular | vertical to the plane which a moving member slides can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, and one end portion thereof is pivotally supported by the moving member so as to be pivoted from one end portion to the opposite side. When the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the direction connecting the other end of the moving member is formed as a longitudinal direction. However, the gaming machine B7, wherein the longitudinal direction of the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member is moved obliquely downward as it goes to the predetermined position, in order to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the moving member is In the case of being arranged at the retracted position, it is necessary to arrange the lower end of the effect member at a position elevated from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by a distance by which the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. It was. For this reason, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the lower portion of the effect member is wasted as a dead space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is disposed below the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. When the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the angle formed between the longitudinal direction of the effect member and the horizontal direction is formed smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is Take a posture that falls down horizontally.

  Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position even if the effect member is disposed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Can be absorbed by the posture change of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower portion of the effect member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position from being wasted as a dead space, and to form the effect member as a larger member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

  The gaming machine B7 includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member moves compared to a case where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the member is disposed at the predetermined position, the gaming machine B8 is inclined in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is more horizontally oriented when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position than when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connecting member, the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction as the auxiliary member is inclined in the horizontal direction. Can be made.

  In addition, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via an auxiliary member that is pivotally supported by the moving member, it is supported by a plurality of members. The effect of suppressing the wobbling of the effect member and the moving member can be remarkably distributed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, so that the weight of the effect member acts on the connecting member effectively. Can be made. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, a force directed in a direction in which the auxiliary member is further tilted with respect to the auxiliary member is effectively applied, so that wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, wobbling of the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity position of the effect member is formed above the gaming machine longitudinal direction above the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the game machine at the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member. Can be evenly allocated in the horizontal direction with the pivotal support position between the moving member and the effect member as a boundary.

  Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member. As a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member It can generate wobble. Thereby, when the effect member is driven, an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member can be performed.

<An example of a technical idea that reduces assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions that are formed to project in the same direction, a lid member that is in contact with an overhanging end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of reflecting members pivotally supported by the portion, and a light source that emits light toward at least one of the plurality of reflecting members, and at least one of the pair of wall portions The wall portion is formed with a plurality of shaft support grooves on the end surface of the projecting end, and the reflecting member is supported by being projected from the body portion and fitted into the shaft support groove. At least one rotation shaft portion, and the rotation shaft portion fitted into the shaft support groove is fitted from the open ends of the plurality of shaft support grooves, and the open ends of the shaft support grooves are attached to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 that is pivotally supported by being closed.

  Here, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable body that is pivotally supported at both ends and is formed so that its posture can be changed in order to change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of LED light sources are provided, a plurality of movable bodies are required, and the work of inserting the movable body through the hole to support the movable body, Thus, it is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole, so that the number of assembly steps increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft support grooves are formed in the wall portion of the base member, the rotation shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted into the shaft support groove, and the open end of the shaft support groove is the lid member. The plurality of reflecting members can be pivotally supported so as to be closed. By rotating these reflecting members, the direction of light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting members can be changed.

  This eliminates the need to insert the reflective member into the hole for pivotal support, and then attach parts (screws, retaining stoppers, etc.) for fixing the reflective member so that it cannot be pulled out of the hole. It is possible to prevent the assembly man-hours from increasing in proportion to the number of.

  In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is formed in the other side opposite to the one, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted obliquely into the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other opposite one is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other opposite one, and the shaft Examples include a case in which after the reflective member is fitted on the pin, the reflective member is tilted so that the shaft portion formed on the other side of the opposite side is fitted into the shaft support groove.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member is fastened to a side surface of the wall portion.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member is formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end surface of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is less than the thickness of the wall portion. This is the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, so that the wall portion is formed thin without being limited to the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflecting member are combined to produce The production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that support the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted into the shaft support hole formed in the lid member, so that the area for supporting the rotating shaft portion is reduced to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness supporting the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the length of the shaft support hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extending portion that extends from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member includes the extending portion. In the state where the fitting part is fitted to the installation part and the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting part is at least in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove and the rotation of the extension part. A gaming machine C4 that is in contact with the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove. It is possible to easily align the wall portion in the adjacent direction of the shaft support groove and the lid member.

  In addition, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, and the wall The rigidity of the part can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the respective axis centers of the pair of wall portions and the adjacent pair of reflecting members is closed by the main body portions of the pair of reflecting members. The game machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axial centers of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source can be shielded by a plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces in the rotational direction of the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main body portions of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be closed. Light leakage can be suppressed.

  Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted. However, in the middle of the sliding movement of the shutter member from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflection member allows light irradiated to the player to pass through by rotating the reflection member from the closed state while suppressing light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member can be made smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light can be shortened when the reflecting member is rotated.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflection surface portions of the adjacent reflection members are formed so as to be able to contact each other, the deviation of the posture of the reflection member can be corrected by another reflection member. Therefore, even if there is a reflection member with a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflection members, the posture of the rotated reflection member is corrected by being in contact with another reflection member. Therefore, the quality of the production of the reflecting member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member is chamfered at the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the abutting portions of the reflecting members facing each other are chamfered, so that the reflecting member can be further tilted toward the adjacent reflecting member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining side surfaces in the rotation direction of a plurality of reflecting members, it is possible to suppress a shift of the pattern at the boundary of the reflecting members.

  Examples of the chamfering method include a method of cutting a curved surface (R is attached), a method of cutting a flat surface, and the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member that is slid by the driving device. The plurality of reflecting members are formed so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions has a transmitted portion abutting on the transmitting member, respectively. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the transmitting member and the reflecting member can be rotated by sliding the transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in a manner that slides in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. Then, the transmitted portions respectively formed on the rotating shaft portions of the plurality of reflecting members are brought into contact with the transmitting member. Here, when the transmission member is slid, the transmission part is rotated and the reflection member is rotated in conjunction with the transmission part. Therefore, the plurality of reflection members can be rotated by the sliding movement of one transmission member. .

  Examples of the transmission member include a belt and a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a cylindrical portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion whose teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can mesh with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion, and teeth formed so as to be meshed with the rack gear portion of the transmission member are formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflecting members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, thereby preventing slippage between the transmitting member and the reflecting member. Can do. Therefore, a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated synchronously.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed with a width larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9 in which expansion teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear part or the transmitted part of the transmission member is larger than the distance between adjacent teeth of the opposed transmitted part or the rack gear part. Since the expansion teeth formed with a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expansion teeth are meshed.

  Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even when the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member is abnormal, it is possible to prevent over-rotation of the reflecting member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member with its own drive device>
An inner surface that is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and is formed so as to be capable of reciprocating sliding movement between the outer side and the inner side of the display region of the liquid crystal display device and in the moving direction inside the display region. And a drive device that drives the pair of moving members, the movable range of one of the pair of moving members being movable. Interferes with the movable range of the other moving member that is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and moves the one moving member to contact the other moving member, and further The gaming machine D1 is configured to move by moving one of the moving members in the same direction so that the other moving member is pushed forward.

  Here, a game machine that makes the liquid crystal display device invisible by moving a pair of actors from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and coming into contact with each other Is known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-040413). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the operation of the pair of objects is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since one moving member abuts on the other moving member, and the other moving member moves, the other moving member is formed to be movable. Unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the driving device that drives the moving member can be formed.

  For example, when the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay associated with the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, causing the monotonousness of the moving member. Therefore, as the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction. Thereby, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the driving device that drives the other moving member.

  In addition, since the pair of moving members can be moved without the synchronization operation of the driving device that drives the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control burden on the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction, the gaming machine D2.

  Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one moving member changes direction is increased by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction, so that one of the movements that abut in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. When changing the direction of a member, the one moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member moving upward from the retracted position, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction, thereby changing the direction of one moving member. It is possible to shorten the period required for the operation. The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction and means a direction that allows a slight horizontal component.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction.

  When one moving member is in contact with the other moving member in the process of moving, and the other moving member is moved by moving the other moving member in the same direction, the driving device of the one moving member is a pair of Since the moving members are moved together, the burden on the driving device increases.

  Here, when a pair of moving members are arranged up and down, the burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged below is more burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged above. Compared to this, there is a difference in the life of the driving device. Therefore, the replacement period of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, and the maintenance schedule becomes difficult compared to the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced simultaneously.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable substantially in the horizontal direction, thereby reducing the difference in load on the pair of driving devices. be able to.

  That is, when the moving member is formed so as to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member does not receive a force due to gravity in the movable direction, so the burden on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, the replacement time for each driving device can be adjusted.

  Note that the direction of the sliding movement of the moving member does not need to coincide with the horizontal direction, and an inclination from the horizontal direction to allow the moving member to be stopped by the frictional force with the driving device is allowed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a base member on which the moving member is disposed, and a shaft rod that guides the moving member to be slidable is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. The shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

  Thus, the shaft rod can be used both as a member that guides the moving member so as to be slidable and a member that improves the rigidity of the base member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D4 is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod, and includes a cart unit having at least both ends of a pair of wheel units formed so as to be able to roll with respect to the shaft rod. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to at least one end of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the carriage part is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the carriage part has a wheel part that can roll on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

  Moreover, since a pair is arrange | positioned by the aspect which pinches | interposes a shaft bar and they are arrange | positioned at at least both ends of a trolley | bogie part, the wheel part can maintain the attitude | position of a shaft bar and a trolley | bogie part uniformly.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other. Thereby, since the resistance concerning a wheel part at the time of contact of a pair of moving members can be raised, the impact at the time of contact of a pair of moving members can be eased.

  In addition, you may form a pair of wheel part which contact | abuts mutually different diameter. In this case, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft rod.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted and is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft rod. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the transmission part and the carriage part are arranged at the end of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted is formed at one end where the carriage portion is disposed. Since the carriage unit is guided and slid by the shaft rod, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit and the driving device can be optimized.

  That is, since the moving member is formed in a long shape, it is easy to bend, and the bend is generated using one end portion where the carriage portion guided by the shaft bar is disposed as a fulcrum. When the transmission unit is formed at the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end where the carriage unit is disposed, the position of the transmission unit is likely to change due to the bending of the moving member. Deviations are likely to occur in the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the member and the driving device. When a shift occurs in the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the driving device, there is a problem that resistance generated between the transmission unit and the driving device during sliding movement of the moving member increases.

  On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end portion where the carriage portion is disposed, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at one end portion, and the moving member is Even if it bends, the position of the transmission part of a moving member is not changed by it. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the driving device can be maintained, and resistance generated between the transmission unit and the driving device when the moving member slides can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect of a transmission part, when the rotation gear is formed from the drive device side, the rack gear part formed in one edge part is illustrated, for example.

  In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the contact of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission unit side.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the displacement due to the bending of the moving member in the calculation of the contacting position of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side to the transmission portion side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end on the opposite side to the transmitting unit side, so that when the pair of moving members are in contact, the transmitting unit The impact on the side can be reduced. Thereby, the load which a drive device receives when a pair of moving member contact | abuts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the moving member extends in parallel with the direction in which the moving member slides, and the other end of the moving member opposite to the one end is connected to the shaft rod. A guide wall portion that is abutted from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft, and the moving member is rotatably supported at the other end portion and a pair of abutments against the guide wall portion A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, the pair of rotating bodies being provided side by side in the sliding direction of the moving member, and being rotated as the moving member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion extends in parallel to the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end portion of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops and the moving member greatly bends and vibrates around one end as a fulcrum, the moving member of the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported at the other end of the moving member. The rotating body on the opposite side to the direction of bending is pressed against the guide wall. Therefore, resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the bending vibration of the moving member, so that it is possible to easily suppress the bending vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

  In addition, since the rotating body and the guide wall are smoothly brought into contact with each other when the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress frictional resistance generated between the guide wall and the moving member when the moving member is started.

  In addition, as an aspect of contact | abutting with a guide wall part and a rotary body, the aspect by which a rack gear is formed in a guide wall part and the gear meshed | engaged with the rack gear of a guide wall part is engraved on the side surface of a rotary body. Is done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes a gear-shaped tooth portion carved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11 includes a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined based on the detection result of the detection device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by an electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to instability of the voltage of the electric motor. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the gaming machine D12 includes a detection device that can detect the position and speed of the pair of moving members. Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted based on the detection result of the detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other, and the pair of moving members are almost unaffected during a collision A constant speed state can be formed. Thereby, the impact at the time of a collision of a pair of moving member can be relieved.

<About the concept of the invention for assisting starting of the suspension member by rotation of the eccentric member>
A base member, a moving device capable of moving between a first position of the base member and a second position different from the first position, and a first drive for generating a driving force for driving the moving device In a gaming machine comprising: a device; an effect device having an operation member that is rotatably supported; and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device; The operating member is separated from the movement locus of the moving device, and the second driving device is driven before the moving device starts from one position of the first position or the second position toward the other position. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the operating member rotates in such a manner that the side closer to the movement locus of the moving device than the center of rotation moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device.

  Here, a base member, a moving device that is movable between a first position of the base member and a second position different from the first position, and a driving force that drives the moving device are generated. A gaming machine is known that includes a first driving device, an effect device that is disposed on a moving device and has an operating member that rotates, and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device. (For example, refer to JP2012-217702A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to move the moving device from one position of the first position or the second position to the other position, in addition to the moving device, the operation member used for the effect and the effect device There is a problem in that a force against the weight is required, and the driving force of the first driving device necessary for starting the moving device is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the operating member is separated from the movement trajectory of the moving device, and before the moving device starts from one position of the first position or the second position toward the other position, 2 The driving device is driven, whereby the operating member is rotated in such a manner that the side closer to the moving locus of the moving device than the center of rotation moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device, and the torque generated thereby is Since the moving device is assisted to start from one position to the other position, the driving force of the first driving device necessary for starting the moving device can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a mode for assisting the start of the moving device, for example, the moving member can be biased even with a unidirectional load represented by vibration or the like. However, when the operating member vibrates, the direction of urging by the vibration is periodically reversed, so that the start timing of the moving member coincides with the moving direction of the moving member. It is necessary to match the timing.

  On the other hand, when the operating member rotates, the counter torque due to the rotation is always applied with the urging force in the same direction if the operating member continues to rotate in the same direction, so the start timing of the moving device is matched to the phase of the operating member. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to start the moving device at an arbitrary timing while maintaining a state in which the starting of the moving device can be assisted by the counter torque of the operating member.

  Even when considering the effect of centrifugal force due to rotation of the operating member, it moves between the state where the centrifugal force is applied upward and the state where the counter torque is higher even if the centrifugal force is applied downward. Since the device can be urged upward, it is possible to ensure a longer period in which the starting direction of the moving device and the direction of the urging force of the operation member can be combined as compared with the case where the operation member is oscillated.

  In addition, when one position is lower than the other position, the starting direction of the moving device is a direction opposite to the gravity, so that the driving force required for starting the moving member increases, but the second driving device By driving the first, the driving force of the first driving device can be assisted. Thereby, the driving force required for the first driving device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the moving device is arranged at the one position, the driving force of the first driving device can be transmitted to the moving device after the driving of the second driving device is started. Before the start of driving of the two-drive device, transmission of the driving force of the first drive device to the moving device is cut off.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when the moving device is arranged at one position, the driving force of the first driving device is transmitted to the moving device after the second driving device starts to be driven. Since the transmission of the driving force of the first driving device to the moving device is interrupted before the driving of the second driving device is started, the second driving device can be used when the moving device is disposed at the second position. It is possible to prevent the moving device from being operated by the driving force of the first driving device before starting. Thereby, it can suppress that an excessive burden is applied to a 1st drive device.

  In addition, as an aspect for switching whether the driving force of the first driving device is transmitted to the moving device or not, for example, the moving device includes a rack gear, and the first driving device can mesh with the rack gear. In the case where the pinion is provided, the rack gear can be moved relative to the moving device, and when the moving device is arranged at the second position, the rack gear is separated from the pinion when the second driving device stops, and the second driving device. When the is operated, the rack gear is brought close to the pinion and meshed.

  The gaming machine E1 or E2 includes a reaction force generator that connects the effect device to the base member, the moving device performs a sliding movement along a straight line, and the reaction force generator is connected to the moving device. One end is pivotally supported and the other end is guided by the base member, and one end is pivotally supported by the auxiliary member, and the other end is moved with respect to the rotation axis of the operation member of the effect device. A connecting member that is pivotally supported by the effect device on the side away from the movement trajectory of the device, and the guiding direction of the auxiliary member is centered on the rotation axis of the operating member, and the auxiliary member. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E3 has a direction along a tangential direction of the shaft fulcrum.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the moving device performs a sliding movement along one straight line, and the guiding direction of the auxiliary member is a connecting member centered on the rotation axis of the operating member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance when the counter torque generated by the rotation of the operating member is directed in the guide direction of the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a large force applied to the auxiliary member. The auxiliary member is pivotally supported at one end by the moving device, and the force applied to the auxiliary member is transmitted to the moving device, so that it is loaded on the moving device. A large amount of power can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving device starts from a state where the moving device is disposed at the one position, so that the center of gravity of the effect device descends vertically downward. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving device starts from a state where it is arranged at one position, so that the center of gravity of the effect device is lowered downward in the vertical direction. Therefore, the driving force for lifting the effect device is not required when the moving device is started, and the driving force required when starting the first driving device from the state where the moving device is disposed at one position can be suppressed. .

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the moving device is disposed at the one position, a straight line connecting the axis and the center of gravity of the operating member is disposed along a plane substantially perpendicular to the direction of gravity, A gaming machine E5, wherein a counter torque that biases the moving device toward the other position is generated by rotating the operating member in a direction in which the operating member starts rotating under a load of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the moving device is arranged at one position, the straight line connecting the axis and the center of gravity of the operating member is substantially perpendicular to the direction of gravity. The counter member is arranged along the plane and generates a counter torque that urges the moving device toward the other position by rotating the operating member in a direction in which the operating member starts to rotate under the load of gravity. Gravity can be used effectively at start-up.

  Here, the direction of gravity and substantially perpendicular means an angle at which the distance from the rotation axis to the center of gravity of the operating member is sufficiently long, for example, an angle from 80 degrees to 100 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. .

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the movement of the moving device has a horizontal component, and the rendering device is close to the operation member when the moving device is arranged at the one position. A second operating member that performs reciprocating movement between the proximity position and the separated position; a moving direction of the second operating member includes a direction component along a moving direction of the moving device; When the moving device is started from the state where the moving device is disposed at the one position, the acceleration of the component along the moving direction of the moving device is increased in the one position side, and 2. A gaming machine E6, wherein the center of gravity of the moving member is disposed on the side of the proximity position.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the moving device is arranged at one position, the rendering device includes a second motion member that performs a reciprocating motion between a proximity position that is close to the motion member and a separation position that is away from the motion member. The moving direction of the second operating member includes a direction component along the moving direction of the moving device, and the second operating member is moved when the moving device is started from a state where the moving device is disposed at one position. The acceleration of the component along the moving direction is increased in one side, and the center of gravity of the second operating member is arranged in the proximity position.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the moving device starts from one position, the moving direction of the moving device is a reaction of the acceleration of the second operating member. And the moment of inertia of the effect device centering on the operating member can be suppressed, and the loss in rotating the effect device due to the counter torque of the operation member can be reduced. Can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention which absorbs the centrifugal force of the rotating member by the movable range of the rack member>
A base member, a moving device that is slidable between a first position and a second position of the base member, a first driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving device, and the moving device. A gaming machine comprising: an effect device having an operating member that is disposed and operates with movement of the center of gravity; and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device. A driven member to which a driving force generated by the first driving device is transmitted; and an arm member that is movable relative to the driven member and on which the rendering device is disposed. The member includes a guide portion extending in a direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction, and the arm member includes a guided portion guided by the guide portion.

  Here, the base member, a moving device that is slidable between the first position and the second position of the base member, a first driving device that generates a driving force that drives the moving device, and movement A gaming machine is known that includes an effect device having an operation member that is disposed in the device and operates with movement of the center of gravity, and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device ( JP, 2012-217702, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a reaction force load such as a centrifugal force generated by driving the effect device is applied to the moving device, and a large load is generated between the first driving device and the moving device, There is a problem that the driving resistance increases and the first driving device or the moving device may be damaged.

  For example, in the case of a load due to the action of centrifugal force, the direction of the load is not constant, and the direction changes. Therefore, a repeated load in the direction of approaching and separating is applied between the first driving device and the moving device, and the first The driving device or the moving device is easily damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the arm member moves relative to the driven member, the load generated from the operating device moves the guided portion of the arm member along the guiding portion of the driven member. It will be consumed especially and it can suppress that a load arises between a 1st drive device and a moving apparatus. Therefore, the driving resistance between the first driving device and the moving device can be suppressed, and the first driving device and the moving device can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, as a guide part, the hollow etc. with which the depth is long rather than the width etc. are illustrated. In the latter case, since the arm member can be arranged in the same layer as the driven member, the space (thickness) for disposing the arm member and the driven member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, when the moving device is arranged at least one of the first position and the second position, the arm member is prevented from moving along the guide portion with respect to the driven member. A gaming machine F2 including an engaging portion.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving device is disposed at least one of the first position and the second position, the arm member moves along the guide portion with respect to the driven member. Since the engaging portion that suppresses the movement is provided, the arm member that has reached the first position or the second position is stopped by the sliding movement of the moving device, and the arm member jumps along the guide portion due to inertia at that time. It is possible to suppress the operation.

  Note that, at the first position and the second position, the sliding movement of the moving device is stopped, so that a change in driving resistance between the first driving device and the moving device cannot occur. Therefore, even if the operating member is operated while the arm member is fixed to the driven member, the possibility that the first driving device or the moving device is damaged is minimized.

  Moreover, as an engaging part, the trough part recessed in trough shape is illustrated, for example in the base member which supports a moving apparatus. In this case, the driven member and the arm member are configured in such a manner that the side wall has a shape that matches the valley, and the arm member approaches the driven member as the moving device approaches the valley.

  In the gaming machine F2, as the closer to the driven member side from the arm member side, the engaging portion is inclined with respect to a line perpendicular to the sliding direction in a direction away from the moving device. The arm member is brought into contact with approaching at least one of the first position and the second position, and an inclined wall portion is provided to move the arm member closer to the driven member side. Is configured in such a manner that the arm member presses the driven member in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving device when the moving device is arranged at at least one of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine F3 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the closer the engagement portion is from the arm member side to the driven member side, the tilt is made with respect to a line perpendicular to the sliding direction in a direction away from the moving device, and the moving device is in the first position or The arm member comes into contact with at least one of the second positions, and includes an inclined wall portion that moves the arm member closer to the driven member side. Alternatively, when arranged at at least one of the second positions, the arm member is configured to press the driven member in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, as the arm member approaches the inclined wall portion, the arm device gradually approaches the driven member along the inclination of the inclined wall portion, and the moving device is in the first position. Alternatively, when the arm member presses the driven member when arranged in at least one of the second positions, it is possible to increase the frictional resistance (such as friction with the guide) of the driven member and stabilize the arrangement of the arm member. Yes (can suppress the bouncing action).

  In addition, as an aspect of the engaging portion, it is configured as a concave portion recessed in a cross-sectional shape, and the side surface of the arm member and the driven member is configured from a shape that matches the shape of the concave portion of the engaging portion, The cross-sectional shape of the engaging portion is composed of a “substantially U-shaped” cross-sectional shape formed by connecting a pair of inwardly curved lines at one end, and the side surfaces of the arm member and the driven member are The case where it comprises from the shape which fits the shape of the recessed part of an engaging part is illustrated.

  In the former case, as the arm member and the driven member approach the engaging portion, the arm member and the driven member can be brought close to each other at a constant speed if the proximity speed is constant.

  In the latter case, as the arm member and the driven member come close to the engaging portion, the arm member and the driven member become closer to the engaging portion as the proximity speed becomes constant. The close proximity speed of the member and the driven member can be reduced. Thereby, it can suppress that an arm member and a to-be-driven member collide vigorously, and are damaged.

  In the gaming machine F2, the base member includes a guide portion that extends in the slide movement direction of the moving member, and a width that allows the arm member to move a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction. A wide guide portion extending along a slide movement direction, the driven member is slid along the guide portion, and the arm member is slid along the wide guide portion, The wide guide portion is perpendicular to the slide movement direction in the range of the wide guide portion where the arm member is disposed when the moving device is disposed in at least one of the first position and the second position. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the engagement portion is configured by shortening the width in a certain direction.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F4 includes a guide portion that guides the operation direction of the driven member and a wide guide portion that guides the operation direction of the arm member, and the wide guide portion moves. When the device is disposed in at least one of the first position and the second position, the width in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction in the range of the wide guide portion in which the arm member is disposed is shortened, and thereby the engagement portion is Since it comprises, a separate member is unnecessary and component cost can be suppressed.

  The aspect of shortening the width of the wide guide part is not particularly limited. For example, the engaging part is shortened by bringing the width of the wide guide part closer to the driven member. It may be configured by shortening the width of the wide guide portion by shortening the width to the side surface opposite to the side surface close to the driven member of the wide guide portion. You may be comprised by shortening by approaching a side surface to the intermediate position of the width direction.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the guide portion includes a recess portion that is recessed along the slide movement direction and has a size that can accommodate at least a part of the arm member. A gaming machine F5, wherein when placed in at least one of the first position or the second position, at least a part of the arm member is accommodated in the recess.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, when the moving device is disposed at least one of the first position and the second position, at least a part of the arm member is accommodated in the recess. Therefore, the moving device is arranged at the first position or the second position, and the load received by the engaging portion by rotating the operating member can be distributed to the hollow portion, so that the engaging portion is prevented from being damaged. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the arm member has a width that allows the arm member to move a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction, and includes a wide guide portion that extends along the slide movement direction, The gaming machine F6, wherein the wide guide portion includes a prevention device that prevents the arm member from running backward with respect to the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes a wide guide portion that guides the movement direction of the arm member, and the wide guide portion runs backward with respect to the driven member of the arm member. When the driven member slides, the arm member receives a load from the operating member, and the arm member moves backward in the direction opposite to the sliding movement of the driven member. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F6, the prevention device is configured by a forming member that forms a space that is recessed toward the outside in the width direction of the wide guide portion with a size that can accommodate at least a part of the arm member. The forming member is configured in such a manner that the arm member accommodated in the space is restrained from moving in the extending direction of the wide guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F6, the prevention device forms a space that is sized to accommodate at least a part of the arm member and recessed toward the outside in the width direction of the wide guide portion. Since the forming member is configured in such a manner that the arm member accommodated in the space is prevented from moving in the extending direction of the wide guide portion, the width direction of the wide guide portion of the arm member is configured. The movement toward can be used for preventing reverse running. Therefore, the prevention device can function without a separate driving device.

  Here, if the space recessed outside is configured as a recess recessed in the width direction of the wide guide portion, in order for the prevention device to function, a mode of centrifugal force applied to the effect device (centrifugal force) Direction) and the mode of operation of the moving device (arrangement of the moving device) need to be linked, and the degree of freedom of the combination of the operating mode of the effect device and the moving device is reduced.

  In contrast, a displacement member that can be displaced in the width direction of the wide guide portion while restricting displacement in the extending direction of the wide guide portion is provided on the side wall in the width direction of the wide guide portion. If multiple arm members are connected in the installation direction, the arm member pushes one displacement member from the width direction of the wide guide portion (arranged on the outer side in the width direction of the wide guide portion), and the extending direction of the wide guide portion Even if the centrifugal force is more suitable, the movement of the arm member in the extending direction of the wide guide portion can be restricted by the adjacent displacement member (arranged in the width direction of the wide guide portion). Accordingly, the prevention device can function without linking the aspect of the centrifugal force applied to the effect device and the operation mode of the moving device, and the degree of freedom of the operation mode of the effect device and the moving device is improved. Can do.

  In the gaming machine F7, on the side wall in the width direction of the wide guide portion, it is possible to displace in the width direction of the wide guide portion, while displacement in the extending direction of the wide guide portion is restricted and the wide guide portion A plurality of displacement members arranged in a row in the extending direction, and one of the displacement members is pushed in the width direction of the wide guide portion to be adjacent to the pushed displacement member. The gaming machine F8, wherein the space portion is disposed between the pair of displacement members.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, by pushing one displacement member in the width direction of the wide guide portion, a pair of displacement members adjacent to the pushed displacement member can be obtained. Since a space is formed between them, the effect of preventing reverse running can be achieved regardless of the position in the slide direction in which the arm member pushes the side surface in the width direction of the wide guide portion.

  In the gaming machine F6, the prevention device is a protruding portion protruding in a sawtooth shape from the side of the wide guide portion, and the protruding portion faces one of the sliding movement directions of the driven member. The gaming machine F9 is characterized in that a side surface extends substantially perpendicular to the sliding movement direction, and the other side surface is inclined at an angle that makes an acute angle with the one side surface.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, the prevention device is a plurality of protruding portions that are continuously protruding in a sawtooth shape from the side of the wide guide portion, The one side surface facing the slide movement direction of the driven member extends substantially perpendicular to the slide movement direction of the moving device, and the other side surface is inclined at an angle that makes an acute angle with the one side surface. Therefore, the width in which the arm member runs backward in the direction opposite to the one side surface can be limited to the distance of the arrangement interval of the projecting portions. Thereby, the reverse running distance of the arm member can be suppressed without controlling the operation speed of the driven member.

  On the other hand, since the angle between the other side surface and the sliding movement direction is an acute angle, the movement of the arm member in the sliding movement direction of the moving device can be prevented from being blocked by the projecting portion. it can.

  In the gaming machine F6, the prevention device is a swinging member that is swingably disposed inside the wide guide portion, and the swinging member is a single member extending along the extending direction of the wide guide member. It is possible to swing in the direction of the load when receiving a load by the arm member from a direction, and provided with a locking piece for restricting the swing when receiving a load by the arm member from another direction. A gaming machine F10 to play.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F6, the gaming machine F10 is disposed inside the wide guide portion and can swing in one direction, but is restricted from swinging in the other direction. Since the prevention device is configured by the swing member, the prevention device can be disposed inside the configuration width of the wide guide portion. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a wide guide part and a vibration isolator can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention which suppresses the counter torque of the eccentric member by the rotation of the tilting member>
A base member, a moving device that is slidable between a first position and a second position of the base member, a first driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving device, and the moving device. In a gaming machine comprising an effect device having an operation member that is rotatably supported and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device, the operation member has its own center of gravity, When the moving device slides from the first position to the second position when compared with the case where the moving device is arranged at the second position. The direction in which the moving device is arranged at the first position is a line perpendicular to a straight line connecting the rotation center of the operating member and the shaft fulcrum of the moving device and the effect device, and the move device and the effect Equipment Straight line passing through the fulcrum, the gaming machine characterized in that the angle is suppressed formed between the sliding direction of the mobile device G1.

  Here, a moving device that is slidable between the first position and the second position, a first driving device that generates a driving force that drives the moving device, and a rotating device that is disposed and rotates. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including an effect device having an operation member that is pivotally supported and a second drive device that generates a driving force that drives the effect device is known (see JP 2012-217702 A). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a reaction force load such as counter torque generated when the operation member of the effect device rotates at a constant speed is always loaded on the moving device in the same direction. Assuming that a load is generated in the same direction as the operation direction, the operation of the moving device is assisted at the start of the operation, while the load becomes an obstacle to braking when the operation is stopped, and is applied to the first drive device at the time of braking of the moving device. There was a problem that the load increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a line that is perpendicular to a straight line connecting the rotation center of the operating member and the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device and passes through the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device (the operating member) When the moving device is started from the first position, the angle formed by the counter torque generated by the rotation of the moving device and the direction of the force applied to the shaft fulcrum of the effect device with the sliding movement direction of the moving device is suppressed. The load caused by the counter torque of the operating member can be easily directed in the operation direction of the moving device, and the driving force of the moving device can be assisted by the counter torque of the operating member.

  In addition, as a mode of movement of the motion member, the motion member moves when the rotation shaft of the motion member is disposed at a position away from the pivot support position of the rendering device and the travel device, and the rendering device rotates with respect to the travel device. Examples of the configuration and the mode in which the operation member moves relative to the effect device are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the moving device slides from the first position to the second position, a line perpendicular to the straight line connecting the rotation center of the operating member and the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device. A gaming machine characterized in that an angle formed by a straight line passing through a pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device and a straight line parallel to the slide moving direction of the moving device increases as the moving device moves. G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, when the moving device slides from the first position to the second position, the rotation center of the operating member and the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device are determined. Since the angle that is perpendicular to the connecting straight line and passes through the shaft support point of the moving device and the production device increases with the movement of the moving device, the moving device moves with the counter torque of the moving member. The component of the force that pushes the device in the direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction can be increased as the moving device moves from the first position to the second position, and the moving member moves from the first position to the second position. The magnitude of the load for braking the moving device can be ensured by the rotation of. As a result, the speed of the first drive device can be reduced and gradually reduced as the moving device moves from the first position to the second position while keeping the rotational speed of the first drive device constant.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the center of gravity of the operating member is arranged below the rotating shaft of the operating member during the sliding movement of the moving device.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the center of gravity of the operating member is always located below the rotating shaft during the sliding movement of the moving device, so that the centrifugal force of the operating member moves. Vibrating the device can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress the load that varies in the vertical direction from being applied to the mobile device. Therefore, the burden placed on the first drive device can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the stage device includes a coupling device that supports the stage device and is supported by the base member so that it can be guided in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction of the moving device. One end is supported by the moving device, the other end is supported by the connecting device, and the rendering device is rotated as the moving device slides, and the operation is performed by the rotation of the rendering device. A straight line that is perpendicular to a straight line connecting the rotation center of the member and the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device, and a straight line passing through the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device is the sliding direction of the moving device. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that an angle formed is changed.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes a coupling device that supports the rendering device. The rendering device is supported at one end by the moving device, and the coupling device has the other. Since the end portion of the moving member and the directing device is supported, the load (counter torque and centrifugal force) generated by the rotation of the operating member and the rendering device is divided into the moving device and the connecting device, so that the moving device and the first driving device The load generated between them can be suppressed.

  In addition, the effect device is slidably moved by having one end pivotally supported by the moving device and the other end connected to the base member so as to be guided in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction of the moving device. Accordingly, the effect device rotates, whereby a line that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the rotation center of the operating member and the pivot point of the moving device and the effect device, and passes through the shaft point of the moving device and the effect device, the moving device Since the angle formed with the slide movement direction is changed, the first driving device can substitute the driving force for rotation of the rendering device.

  When the second drive device is arranged on the coupling device side (the other end side), most of the load generated from the operating member can be borne by the coupling member. That is, the influence of the counter torque can be adjusted by adjusting the arm length from the rotating shaft of the operating member to each support point.

  In the gaming machine G4, the connection device includes an auxiliary member whose one end is supported by the moving device and whose other end is supported so as to be guided by the base member, and one end of the effect device. And a connecting member whose other end is pivotally supported by the auxiliary member, and when the effect device is disposed at least at the end position of the slide movement, Of the two regions separated by a straight line drawn perpendicularly to the slide movement direction of the moving device through the rotation axis, the region opposite to the region including the pivot support position of the moving device and the effect device The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the connecting member.

  Here, as the angle between the straight line perpendicular to the slide movement direction of the moving device and the straight line drawn from the pivot support position of the moving device and the production device to the rotation axis of the moving member approaches 90 degrees, the moving member Although the force for braking the moving device is increased by the reaction force of the rotation (the force due to the counter torque), for example, when the number of rotations of the operating member increases, the force for braking becomes too strong, and the first drive device There has been a problem that the driving resistance is increased and the moving device is rubbed and worn.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, when the effect device is disposed at least at the slide movement end position, the moving device slides through the rotation axis of the operating member. The auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the connecting member in a region opposite to the region including the pivot support position of the moving device and the rendering device among the two regions separated by the dividing straight line drawn perpendicular to the direction. Therefore, the rotational reaction force of the operating member applied to the connecting member via the auxiliary member (the force due to the counter torque) is slid relative to the reactive force loaded at the shaft support position between the effect device and the moving device. It acts in the opposite direction along the direction perpendicular to the direction, and the braking force applied to the moving device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G5, as the moving device moves in one direction between the first position and the second position, a perpendicular drawn from the sliding movement direction to the rotating shaft of the operating member, and the operating member The angle formed by the straight line drawn from the rotation shaft to the pivot support position of the connecting member and the auxiliary member gradually increases, and the perpendicular drawn from the slide movement direction to the rotation shaft of the operation member, and the operation member The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the angle formed by the straight line drawn from the rotating shaft to the shaft support position of the moving device and the effect device gradually increases.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the moving device is pulled in one direction between the first position and the second position from the sliding movement direction to the rotating shaft of the operating member. The angle formed by the vertical line and the straight line drawn from the rotating shaft of the moving member to the pivot support position of the connecting member and the auxiliary member gradually increases, and the vertical line drawn from the sliding movement direction to the rotating shaft of the moving member and the moving member The angle formed by the straight line drawn from the rotary shaft to the pivot support position of the moving device and the production device gradually increases, so the force applied to each support point is only one of the forces due to the counter torque due to the rotation of the operating member. In addition, since both are gradually increased, it is possible to ensure the effect of reducing the braking force applied to the moving device.

  In the gaming machine G5 or G6, compared to the length of the auxiliary member from the axial support position with the moving device to the axial support position with the connecting member, the auxiliary member is supported with the connecting member. A gaming machine G7, wherein a length from a position to a support position with the base member is shortened.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, compared to the length of the auxiliary member from the axial support position with the moving member to the axial support position with the connecting member, Since the length from the pivot support position with the connecting member to the support position with the base member is shortened, the distribution of the force applied along the width direction (short direction) of the auxiliary member is transmitted to the base member. The distribution transmitted to the mobile device can be made smaller than the distribution. Thereby, the load applied from the auxiliary member to the moving device along the width direction (short direction) of the auxiliary member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G4 to G7, the connecting member is biased in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and the biasing direction biases the effect device along the rotation direction of the center of gravity of the operating member. Gaming machine G8 characterized by being direction.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G4 to G7, the connecting member is biased in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and the biasing direction is along the rotation direction of the center of gravity of the operating member. Since the direction of the effect device is biased, it is possible to suppress the change of the orientation of the effect device when the counter torque of the operation member changes (when the rotation speed of the operation member changes). In other words, the effect device can be pressed in one direction by the urging force, and the posture of the effect device can be maintained.

  In any one of the gaming machines G4 to G8, a straight line drawn from the shaft support position of the moving device and the effect device to the shaft support position of the effect device and the connection member, and the shaft support of the auxiliary member and the connection member The straight line drawn from the position to the pivot support position of the effect member and the connecting member is configured with an equal length, and the angle formed by the pair of straight lines is such that the moving device is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine G9 is suppressed when it is present, and is substantially vertical when the moving device is disposed at the second position.

  According to gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines G4 to G8, a straight line drawn from the pivot support position of the moving device and the rendering device to the pivot support position of the rendering device and the connecting member, the auxiliary member, The straight line drawn from the pivot support position of the coupling member to the pivot support position of the effect member and the coupling member is configured with an equal length, and the angle formed by the pair of straight lines is such that the moving device is disposed at the first position. If the moving device is arranged at the first position, the rendering device is not connected to the moving device. By facilitating the swing, the torque at the start of rotation of the operating member can be absorbed and the torque can be prevented from being transmitted to the rack member. On the other hand, when the moving device is arranged at the second position, the effect device moves. Swing with respect to the device Won, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the performance apparatus.

  In any of the gaming machines G4 to G9, the auxiliary member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to overhang, and the overhanging portion is the base member when the moving device is disposed at the first position. When the moving device is disposed at the second position, it is formed so as to be able to contact the base member in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving device. A gaming machine G10 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G4 to G9, the overhanging portion is in a mode of maintaining a space between the base member when the moving device is disposed at the first position. When the moving device is arranged at the second position, it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the base member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving device, so that it assists when the moving device is arranged at the first position. While the resistance applied to the member is suppressed and the rendering device can easily swing, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the base member when the moving device is disposed at the second position, so that the auxiliary member is excessively deformed. Can be suppressed. Thereby, when the moving device is arranged at the second position, a load exerted on the moving device from the auxiliary member is suppressed, and a load generated between the moving device and the base member can be suppressed.

  The overhanging piece may be configured to also serve as the detection piece of the detection sensor.

<About the concept of the invention which suppresses the load of the eccentric member by the reaction of the operation of the slide member>
In a gaming machine comprising a rendering device having a first motion member that operates with movement of the center of gravity, and a first drive device that generates a driving force for driving the rendering device, the first motion member is a center of gravity position. Is eccentrically supported by the effect device, and the effect device includes a second action member that operates in conjunction with the first action member, and the reaction force of the rotation of the first action member is A gaming machine H1 configured to be capable of adjusting a load applied to the effect device by combining with a reaction force of the operation of the second operation member.

  Here, a gaming machine including an effect device having an operation member that operates with movement of the center of gravity, and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012). No. 217702). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the stage device vibrates due to reaction force such as counter torque and centrifugal force generated by driving the operation member, but there is a problem that the mode of the vibration cannot be controlled. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first operation member is pivotally supported by the effect device in a state where the position of the center of gravity is eccentric, and the effect device includes the second operation member that operates in conjunction with the first operation member. Since the reaction force such as counter torque and centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the first operation member is combined with the reaction force of the operation of the second operation member, the load applied to the rendering device can be adjusted. The mode of vibration of the rendering device can be controlled by the mode of motion of the second motion member.

  Examples of the second operating member include a member that performs linear sliding that can cancel at least the centrifugal force, and a member that performs a rotating operation that can cancel not only the centrifugal force but also the counter torque of the first operating member.

  In the gaming machine H1, the second operation member is configured to reciprocally slide in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first operation member, and the second operation is performed as the first operation member makes one rotation. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the member is reciprocated once, and the first motion member and the second motion member move in opposite directions along the sliding movement direction of the second motion member.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the second motion member is configured to reciprocate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first motion member, and the first motion member rotates once. Accordingly, the second motion member is reciprocated once, and the first motion member and the second motion member move in the opposite directions along the slide movement direction of the second motion member. At least a part of the force of the second moving member in the sliding movement direction can be canceled out by the reaction force caused by the sliding movement of the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine H1, the second operation member is configured to reciprocally slide in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first operation member, and the second operation is performed as the first operation member makes one rotation. The gaming machine H3, wherein the member is reciprocated once, and the first motion member and the second motion member move in the same direction along a slide movement direction of the second motion member.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the second motion member is configured to reciprocate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the first motion member, and the first motion member rotates once. Accordingly, the second motion member is reciprocated once, and the first motion member and the second motion member move in the same direction along the slide movement direction of the second motion member. The force of the slide movement direction component of the second movement member and the reaction force due to the slide movement of the second movement member are directed in the same direction, increasing the load applied to the effect device along the slide movement direction of the second movement member Can be made. Thereby, a production | presentation apparatus can be shaken more greatly along the slide movement direction of a 2nd operation member, and a production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H2, a base member, a moving device that can slide between the first position and the second position of the base member, and a second driving device that generates a driving force that drives the moving device, And when the moving device is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the sliding movement direction of the second operating member is perpendicular to the sliding movement direction of the moving device or A gaming machine H4 characterized by facing a substantially vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, when the moving device is arranged at least one of the first position and the second position, the sliding movement direction of the second operating member is the sliding movement of the moving device. Since the direction is perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the direction, the direction in which the load of each member cancels out of the load applied to the effect device from the first motion member and the second motion member is the vertical direction of the slide movement direction of the movement device Therefore, the displacement of the moving device in the direction perpendicular to the sliding movement direction can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that a friction resistance arises in a moving apparatus, and can suppress the drive resistance at the time of starting a moving apparatus from at least one of a 1st position or a 2nd position.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a base member, a moving device that is slidable between the first position and the second position of the base member, and a driving force that drives the moving device are generated. A second driving device, wherein the second operating member includes an operating direction component along a moving direction of the moving device, and a force generated by centrifugal force and torque of the first operating member, and the second operating member. A game in which a speed at which the moving device is operated is reduced when a load applied to the moving device as a resultant force with a reaction force of the operation is directed in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device. Machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a base member and a moving device that is slidable between the first position and the second position of the base member; A second driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving device, and the second operating member includes an operating direction component along a moving direction of the moving device, and is based on the centrifugal force and torque of the first operating member. When the load applied to the moving device as a resultant force of the force and the reaction force of the second operation member is directed in the opposite direction to the moving direction of the moving device, the speed at which the moving device is operated is reduced. Even if the moving device receives a load in the sliding operation direction, damage to the second driving device and the moving device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H5, the second driving device includes a rotating gear that meshes with the moving device, and the rotating gear includes a meshing portion that includes gear teeth that transmit a driving force to the moving device; A non-transmission portion for non-transmission of driving force to the moving device, and the moving device as a resultant force of the force of centrifugal force and torque of the first operating member and the reaction force of the operation of the second operating member The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the non-transmitting portion is disposed to face the moving device when a load applied to the vehicle is directed in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the rotating gear includes a meshing portion configured with gear teeth that transmit the driving force to the moving device, and a non-transmitting force that does not transmit the driving force to the moving device. And a load applied to the moving device as a resultant force of the force of centrifugal force and torque of the first operating member and the reaction force of the operation of the second operating member in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device. Since the non-transmission part is arranged opposite to the moving device when facing the load, the load is applied from the moving device to the rotating gear along the sliding direction of the moving device when a load is applied in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving device. Can be prevented from being applied.

  Thereby, control of a 2nd drive device can be simplified and durability of a 1st drive device and a moving apparatus can be improved simultaneously.

  As the non-transmission part, the first drive device is provided with a pinion, the portion of the pinion is not formed and the peripheral surface is formed in an arc shape, and the portion that is fitted and slid with the moving device Illustrated.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a base member, a moving device that is slidable between the first position and the second position of the base member, and a driving force that drives the moving device are generated. And a second drive device, one end of which is supported by the moving device, the other end of which is connected to the base member, and the posture with respect to the moving device as the moving device moves An auxiliary member that changes, and a connecting member that has one end pivotally supported by the auxiliary member and the other end pivotally supported by the effect device, and the point that the moving device pivotally supports the effect device and the effect The lengths of a straight line connecting points where the device pivotally supports the connecting member and a straight line connecting points where the auxiliary member pivotally supports the connecting member and points where the rendering device pivotally supports the connecting member are substantially equal. And the mobile device is In a state of being arranged at the first position, a line connecting a point where the moving device pivotally supports the effect device and a point where the effect device pivotally supports the connecting member, and the auxiliary member pivotally supports the connecting member. And the moving device is disposed at the second position, and the moving device is disposed at the second position. A straight line connecting a point that pivots the rendering device and a point where the rendering device pivotally supports the connecting member, a point where the auxiliary member pivotally supports the coupling member, and a point where the rendering device pivotally supports the coupling member The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that an angle intersecting a straight line connecting the two is substantially vertical.

  Here, when the second operation member is a member that slides, it is difficult to suppress the load in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the second operation member by the operation of the second operation member. Therefore, in order to suppress the load in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the second operation member from being transmitted to the moving device, it is necessary to arrange another buffer member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, it is possible to slide between the base member and the first position and the second position of the base member. A moving device and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the moving device, and a straight line connecting a point where the moving device pivotally supports the effect device and a point where the rendering device pivotally supports the connecting member; The length of the point where the auxiliary member pivotally supports the connecting member and the straight line connecting the point where the rendering device pivotally supports the connecting member is substantially equal, and the intersecting angle in the state where the moving device is disposed at the first position In a state where the moving device is disposed at the second position, the intersecting angle is substantially vertical, so that the rendering device pivots on the moving device when the moving device is disposed at the first position. Can be easily swung, and the centrifugal force of the operating member While it prevented from being transferred to the mobile device (consumed the swing of the performance apparatus), it can easily prevent the effect device is swung in a state where the mobile device is placed in the second position.

  That is, in the state where the moving device is arranged at the second position, the effect member is loaded in the direction in which the connecting member is compressed and expanded between the effect device and the auxiliary member, so that the swing of the effect member is suppressed. Although it is easy, since the load is applied from the effect member in the direction of swinging the connecting member between the effect member and the auxiliary member in the state where the moving device is arranged at the first position, the effect member is caused to swing. Easy state can be maintained. Note that “substantially parallel” means that the angle formed is between 0 degrees and about 20 degrees.

  In the gaming machine H7, the auxiliary member includes a straight line connecting a point where the moving device pivotally supports the rendering device and a point where the rendering device pivotally supports the coupling member, and the auxiliary member pivotally supports the coupling member. And an urging member that urges the connecting member toward a state in which an intersecting angle with a straight line connecting a point where the effecting device pivotally supports the connecting member is substantially vertical. Machine H8.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the auxiliary member connects the straight line connecting the point where the moving device pivots the effect device and the point where the direction device pivots the connecting member, and the auxiliary member connects Since the moving device includes an urging member that urges the connecting member toward a state in which the angle intersecting the straight line connecting the point supporting the member and the point where the effect device supports the connecting member is substantially vertical, the moving device is In the state arranged at the first position, the swing of the effect device can be converged at an early stage, and when the moving device is arranged at the second position, the position of the connecting member is fixed to the auxiliary member. can do.

In the gaming machine H7 or H8, the second operation member is slid along a straight line,
The gaming machine H9, wherein an operation direction of the second operation member and a longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member are substantially parallel.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7 or H8, the second operating member is slid along a straight line, and the operating direction of the second operating member and the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member are substantially parallel. Therefore, when the centrifugal force of the first operation member is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the second operation member, the centrifugal force can be borne (received by the surface) in the entire longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member. The load applied to the mobile device can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to adjust how the centrifugal force is applied to the moving device by the configuration of the auxiliary member.

  In addition, the shape of an auxiliary member is not specifically limited, A various aspect can be considered. For example, if it is a mode which bends like a bow, the load by the centrifugal force of the 1st operation member can be absorbed by the elastic shape change of an auxiliary member. For example, if it is a wave shape, the dispersion | distribution degree of centrifugal force can be enlarged compared with the case where an auxiliary member is formed in a linear shape.

  In the gaming machine H9, when the second operation member slides, the center of gravity of the rendering device is arranged on the first position side with respect to the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device; and Switching between the movement device and the stage device on the second position side with respect to the shaft fulcrum, and the centrifugal force of the first operating member is the shaft fulcrum of the movement device and the production device The game machine H10 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the effect device is applied in the direction opposite to the direction in which it can rotate by gravity.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H9, the second operation member slides, so that the center of gravity of the rendering device is arranged on the first position side with respect to the pivot point of the moving device and the rendering device. And the case where the moving device and the rendering device are arranged on the second position side with reference to the axial fulcrum of the moving device and the rendering device, and the centrifugal force of the first operating member is the pivotal fulcrum of the moving device and the rendering device Since the center of gravity of the effect device is applied in the direction opposite to the direction in which the effect device can rotate due to gravity, a change in the posture of the effect member caused by the centrifugal force of the first operation member can be suppressed by a change in the position of the center of gravity of the effect device. .

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine E1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine E2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
312 Oscillating shaft 313 Transmission shaft (first axis)
315 Guide hole (second guide part)
316, 2316 Standing hole (first guide)
316a, 2316a Posture change parts 316b, 2316b Concentric circular part 320 Arm member (moving member)
321 Body part 324 Fore part (decoration part)
325 Release hole (guide section)
326 Sliding part (second protrusion)
330 Standing Member (Director)
332 Overhang ring (oscillating shaft)
333 Change sliding part (first protrusion)
340, 2340 Driving device (release device, driving device)
350, 2350 Transmission device (position regulating device, first rotating body)
351 Regulating sliding part (pin member)
360 Torsion spring (biasing device)
410 Base member 413 Guide rib part (guide part)
430 Suspension member (moving member, moving device)
433 Bent arm (overhang, contact, hand)
440 Drive device (first drive device, second drive device)
450 Auxiliary member (part of reaction force generator, part of coupling device)
452 Swing hole (one end)
453 Slide shaft (the other end)
455 Overhang piece (overhang part)
460, 2460 Tilt member (production member, production device)
461a Suspended shaft (one end)
461b Connecting shaft (the other end)
464 drive device (first drive device, second drive device)
465 Moving base member (part of second motion member)
466 2nd cover member (a part of 2nd operation member)
470, 2470 connecting member (part of reaction force generator, part of connecting device)
510 Base member 511 Bottom surface portion 512 First wall portion (wall portion)
512a Shaft support groove 513 Second wall (wall)
513a Shaft support groove 513b Extension portion 520 Reflective member 521 Main body portion 521a Chamfered portion (contact portion)
522 Rotating shaft (Rotating shaft)
523 Rotating gear (transmitted part)
530 First lid member (lid member)
531 Shaft Support Hole 540 Second Lid Member (Lid Member)
543 Positioning protrusion (fitting part)
550 Transmission member 553 1st rack gear (rack gear part)
560 Driving device 710, 2710 Base member 715 Guide wall 715a Receiving gear 720, 2720 First slide member (moving member)
721a Rack part (transmission part)
722 bogie part 722b rotating body group (wheel part)
740 Second slide member (moving member)
741 Body (Transmission part)
742 Carriage part 742b Rotating body group (wheel part)
743a Deflection suppression gear (rotating body)
770 Drive device 2716 Detection device 3467 Eccentric member (operational member)
4417 Wide guide hole (wide guide part, part of engagement part)
4417b Prevention convex part (protruding part, part of prevention device)
4430a Driven member 4431a Guide recess (guide portion)
4430b Arm member 4433b Guided convex part (guided part)
6418 engagement wall (inclined wall)
6431a1 Upper bottom recess (dent)
7418 Locking member (locking piece)
8418 Movable piece (displacement member, forming member, part of prevention device)
9443 Transmission gear (rotating gear)
9443b1 Arc part (non-transmission part)
9443b2 Intermeshing part D1 Major axis direction (first direction)
D2 minor axis direction (second direction)
G, G03 Center of gravity P Display area S1 First slide shaft bar (shaft bar)
S2 Second slide shaft rod (shaft rod)
SP3 Torsion spring (biasing member)
X direction Y direction

Claims (3)

A base member, a moving device capable of moving between a first position of the base member and a second position different from the first position, and a first drive for generating a driving force for driving the moving device In a gaming machine comprising: a device; an effect device having an operation member that is rotatably supported; and a second drive device that generates a driving force for driving the effect device;
The operating member is separated from the movement locus of the moving device, and the second driving device is driven before the moving device starts from one position of the first position or the second position toward the other position. And
A gaming machine, wherein the operating member rotates in a manner in which a side closer to a movement locus of the moving device than a rotation center moves in a direction opposite to a moving direction of the moving device. When the moving device is disposed at the one position,
After the driving of the second driving device is started, the driving force of the first driving device can be transmitted to the moving device,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein transmission of the driving force of the first driving device to the moving device is interrupted before the driving of the second driving device is started. A reaction force generator for connecting the effect device to the base member;
The moving device performs a sliding movement along a straight line,
The reaction force generator includes an auxiliary member that is pivotally supported at one end by the moving device and guided at the other end by the base member, and one end pivotally supported by the auxiliary member. A connecting member that is pivotally supported by the effect device on the side away from the movement trajectory of the moving device with respect to the rotation axis of the operating member,
3. The guide direction of the auxiliary member is a direction along a tangential direction of a shaft fulcrum between the connecting member and the auxiliary member with the rotation axis of the operation member as a center. The gaming machine described.

Images